BIOLOGY LIBRARY 
 
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 SCHOOL OF PUBLIC HEALTH 
 3563 LIFE SCIENCES BUILDING 
 
 r. LEGGE, M. D. 
 
 6 ROBLE ROAD 
 BERKELEY, CALIF. 
 
WORKS BY 
 CHARLES F. BOLDUAN, M.D. 
 
 PUBLISHED BY 
 
 JOHN WILEY & SONS 
 
 Immune Sera. 
 
 A concise exposition of the main facts and 
 theories of infection and immunity, Fourth 
 edition, rewritten. By Charles F. Bolduan, M.D. 
 12mo, ix + 226 pages. Cloth, $1.50. 
 
 TRANSLATIONS. 
 The Suppression of Tuberculosis. 
 
 Together with Observations concerning Phthisio- 
 genesis in Man and Animals, and Suggestions con- 
 cerning the Hygiene of Cow Stables and the Pro- 
 duction of Milk for Infant Feeding, with Special 
 Reference to Tuberculosis. By Professor E. von 
 Behring, University of Marburg. Authorized 
 Translation by Charles F. Bolduan, M.D. 12mo, 
 vi + 85 pages. Cloth, $1.00. 
 
 Manual of Serum Diagnosis. 
 
 By Doctor O. Rostoski, University of Wurzburg. 
 Authorized Translation by Charles F. Bolduan, 
 M.D. 12mo, vi + 86 pages. Cloth, $1.00. 
 
 Studies in Immunity. 
 
 By Professor Paul Ehrlich. Translated by Charles 
 F. Bolduan, M.D. Second Edition, Revised and 
 Enlarged. 8vo, xi + 712 pages. Cloth, $6.00. 
 
IMMUNE SERA 
 
 A CONCISE EXPOSITION OF THE 
 MAIN FACTS AND THEORIES OF 
 
 INFECTION AND IMMUNITY 
 
 BY 
 
 DR. CHARLES FREDERICK BOLDUAN 
 
 BACTERIOLOGIST, RESEARCH LABORATORY, DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH 
 CITY OF NEW YORK 
 
 FOURTH EDITION, REWRITTEN AND ENLARGED 
 FIRST THOUSAND 
 
 NEW YORK: 
 
 JOHN WILEY & SONS 
 
 LONDON: CHAPMAN & HALL, LIMITED 
 
 1911 
 
9tl 
 
 67 
 
 COPYRIGHT, 1907, 1908, 1911. 
 BT CHARLES FREDERICK BOLDUAN 
 
 THE SCIENTIFIC PRESS 
 
 ROBERT DRUMMOND AND COMPANY 
 
 BROOKLYN, N. Y. 
 
TO 
 HERMANN M. BIGGS, M.D., LL.D. 
 
 PIONEER IN SPECIFIC SERUM THERAPY AND SERUM 
 
 DIAGNOSIS IN AMERICA, FOUNDER OF THE 
 
 FIRST MUNICIPAL SERUM LABORATORY 
 
 IN THE WORLD, THIS VOLUME 
 
 IS DEDICATED AS A TOKEN 
 
 OF GREAT ADMIRATION 
 
 AND ESTEEM 
 
PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION 
 
 THE favorable reception accorded to the previous 
 editions of this book, together with the fact that 
 our knowledge of the subject has increased con- 
 siderably in the past few years, has led the author 
 to undertake a thorough revision of the work. 
 
 In its first edition, in 1904, this book dealt only 
 with certain antibodies whose discovery had aroused 
 a great deal of scientific interest, namely, hsemoly- 
 sins, cytotoxins, and precipitins. To this was 
 added, in subsequent editions, a discussion of anti- 
 toxins, agglutinins, and opsonins. All these topics 
 were naturally embraced under the title " Immune 
 Sera." In the present (fourth) edition, while the 
 old title has been retained, the scope of the sub- 
 ject matter has been greatly extended, so that now 
 there is presented an exposition of the main facts 
 of infection and immunity. 
 
 It is but natural that any discussion of the 
 immunity reactions should center about the ingen- 
 ious side-chain theory of Ehrlich, which has domi- 
 nated the work in this field. Its heuristic value 
 
vi PREFACE 
 
 has unquestionably been very great. At the same 
 time it cannot be doubted that some of the deduc- 
 tions from the theory have led, here and there, 
 to strained conceptions which apparently violate 
 established biological facts. While presenting 
 Ehrlich's views at length, therefore, the author 
 has endeavored to bring out clearly just why and 
 wherein certain other investigators differ. The aim 
 of the book has been to present a broad, clear outline 
 of the main facts and theories concerning infection 
 and immunity, and while this may perhaps have 
 led to the omission of some really excellent studies, 
 it was felt best not to confuse the beginner with a 
 mass of apparently contradictory observations. 
 
 CHARLES BOLDUAN. 
 
 NEW YORK, April, 1911. 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Antitoxins i 
 
 HISTORICAL ; i 
 
 PRESENT METHOD OF PRODUCING DIPHTHERIA ANTI- 
 TOXIN 2 
 
 PRODUCTION OF DIPHTHERIA TOXIN 2 
 
 IMMUNIZING THE ANIMALS 3 
 
 COLLECTING THE SERUM 4 
 
 TESTING THE STRENGTH OF THE SERUM 5 
 
 EHRLICH'S THEORY FOR PRODUCTION 6 
 
 TOXINS, TOXOIDS 6 
 
 RECEPTORS 9 
 
 WEIGERT'S OVERPRODUCTION THEORY 10 
 
 EXPERIMENTAL EVIDENCE FOR EHRLICH'S THEORY... . 13 
 
 ANTIGENS OR HAPTINS 16 
 
 NATURE OF ANTITOXINS IN GENERAL 17 
 
 TOXINS AND OTHER POISONOUS CELL DERIVATIVES IN 
 
 GENERAL 20 
 
 RELATIONS BETWEEN TOXIN AND ANTITOXIN 22 
 
 "L "and "L t " 23 
 
 PARTIAL SATURATION METHOD OF STUDYING TOXINS 
 
 TOXONS, TOXOIDS 23 
 
 EHRLICH'S " POISON SPECTRA " 24 
 
 VIEWS OF ARRHENIUS, BORDET, AND OTHERS 28 
 
 Agglutinins 3 2 
 
 THE PHENOMENON 32 
 
 H^MAGGLUTININS 34 
 
 ISOAGGLUTININS 35 
 
 PURPOSE OF AGGLUTINATION 36 
 
 HISTORICAL 37 
 
 PFAUNDLER'S REACTION (THREAD REACTION). . 38 
 
 vii 
 
CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 NATURE OF AGGLUTININS AND OF THE AGGLUTINATION 
 
 REACTION ...................................... 39 
 
 AGGLUTINOIDS ...................................... 39 
 
 GROUP AGGLUTININS : ............................... 43 
 
 ABSORPTION METHODS FOR DIFFERENTIATING BETWEEN 
 
 A MIXED AND A SINGLE INFECTION ................ 46 
 
 FORMATION OF AGGLUTININS ACCORDING TO THE ^IDE- 
 CHAIN THEORY, RECEPTORS OF FIRST, SECOND, AND 
 
 THIRD ORDER .................................. 47 
 
 Bacteriolysins and Haemolysins .................. 5 o 
 
 HISTORICAL ........................................ 50 
 
 FFEIFFER'S PHENOMENON ............................ 51 
 
 HAEMOLYSIS ........................................ 52 
 
 NATURE OF H^MOLYTIC SERA .................... . . 54 
 
 ANALOGY BETWEEN THE BACTERIOLYTIC AND HVEMO- 
 
 LYTIC PROCESSES ............................... 57 
 
 EHRLICH AND MORGENROTH ON THE NATURE OF HAEMO- 
 
 LYSIS .......................................... 58 
 
 THEIR THREE CLASSIC EXPERIMENTS ................ 59 
 
 NOMENCLATURE ................................... 63 
 
 ROLE OF THE IMMUNE BODY ............. .- ......... 64 
 
 ON WHAT THE SPECIFICITY DEPENDS ................ 65 
 
 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN A SPECIFIC SERUM AND A NOR- 
 
 MAL ONE ......................... .. ............ 66 
 
 DIVERGING VIEWS OF EHRLICH AND BORDET ........... 67 
 
 THE SIDE-CHAIN THEORY APPLIED TO THESE BODIES. . . 68 
 
 MULTIPLICITY OF COMPLEMENTS ...................... 70 
 
 THE BORDET-GENGOU PHENOMENON; NEISSER- 
 
 SACHS BLOOD TEST ............................. 71 
 
 NORMAL SERUM, ITS H^MOLYTIC AND BACTERIOLYTIC 
 
 , ACTION ........................................ 73 
 
 ACTIVE AND INACTIVE NORMAL SERUM ....... '. ...... 75 
 
 ACTION NOT ENTIRELY SPECIFIC .................... 77 
 
 MULTIPLICITY OF THE ACTIVE SUBSTANCES ........... 78 
 
 DIFFERENCE BETWEEN A NORMAL AND A SPECIFIC IM- 
 
 MUNE SERUM ................................... 79 
 
 NATURE OF THE IMMUNE BODY PARTIAL IMMUNE 
 
 BODIES OF EHRLICH. . 82 
 
CONTENTS { x 
 
 PAGE 
 
 METCHNIKOFF'S VIEWS 84 
 
 SUPPORT FOR EHRLICH'S VIEW 85 
 
 ANTIH^MOLYSINS: THEIR NATURE ANTI-COMPLEMENT 
 
 OR ANTI-IMMUNE BODY 86 
 
 ANTI-COMPLEMENT 88 
 
 FLUCTUATIONS IN THE AMOUNT OF THE ACTIVE SUB- 
 STANCES IN SERUM 91 
 
 SOURCE OF THE COMPLEMENTS LEUCOCYTES AS A 
 
 SOURCE OTHER SOURCES 93 
 
 STRUCTURE OF THE COMPLEMENTS COMPLEMENTOIDS. . . 94 
 
 ISOLYSINS AUTOLYSINS ANTI-ISOLYSINS 97 
 
 DEFLECTION OF COMPLEMENT 100 
 
 PRACTICAL VALUE OF ANTI-BACTERIAL SERA 104 
 
 Precipitins 107 
 
 DEFINITIONS 107 
 
 BACTERIAL PRECIPITINS 108 
 
 LACTOSERUM OTHER SPECIFIC PRECIPITINS 108 
 
 SPECIFICITY OF THE PRECIPITINS 109 
 
 NATURE OF THE PRECIPITINS in 
 
 PRACTICAL APPLICATION 112 
 
 THE WASSERMANN-UHLENHUTH BLOOD TEST 113 
 
 IMMUNIZING THE ANIMALS 114 
 
 COLLECTING THE SERUM 115 
 
 THE TEST 116 
 
 APPEARANCE OF THE REACTION 117 
 
 DELICACY OF THE PRECIPITIN TEST 118 
 
 OTHER APPLICATIONS OF THE PRECIPITIN TEST , . . 1 18 
 
 ANTIPRECIPITINS ISOPRECIPITINS 119 
 
 Cy totoxins 121 
 
 DEFINITION, LEUCOTOXIN NATURE OF THE CYTOTOXIN 
 
 ANTICYTOTOXIN 121 
 
 Nt v UROTOXIN 122 
 
 SPERMOTOXIN 123 
 
 COMMON RECEPTORS 124 
 
 CYTOTOXIN FOR EPITHELIUM 124 
 
 CYTOTOXINS BY THE USE OF NUCLEOPROTEIDS 125 
 
 Opsonins 127 
 
 HISTORICAL 127 
 
X CONTENTS 
 
 PAGE 
 
 BACTERIOTROPIC SUBSTANCES 129 
 
 OPSONINS DISTINCT ANTIBODIES. 130 
 
 STRUCTURE OF OPSONINS 130 
 
 THE OPSONIC INDEX 131 
 
 TECHNIQUE 131 
 
 VALUE OF THE OPSONIC MEASUREMENTS 133 
 
 vSnake Venoms and their Antisera 137 
 
 THE VENOMS 137 
 
 ANTIVENIN'S 139 
 
 Anaphylaxis 141 
 
 HISTORICAL 141 
 
 THE PHENOMENON 142 
 
 SERUM RASHES 143 
 
 THEORIES OF ANAPHYLAXIS 144 
 
 ALLERGY 147 
 
 SUPPOSED RELATION TO PRECIPITIN ACTION 148 
 
 PATHOLOGY OF ANAPHYLACTIC SHOCK 150 
 
 RELATION OF ANAPHYLAXIS TO SERUM THERAPY 151 
 
 Infection and Immunity 154 
 
 INFECTION 154 
 
 THE INFECTING AGENT 154 
 
 ANAPHYLATOXIN 157 
 
 RESISTANCE AGAINST INFECTION 158 
 
 NATURAL IMMUNITY 159 
 
 ACQUIRED IMMUNITY 160 
 
 MECHANISM OF IMMUNITY 162 
 
 RELATION OF ANAPHYLAXIS TO IMMUNITY 163 
 
 IMMUNITY REACTION OF THE PART OF BACTERIA 165 
 
 ATREPSY 166 
 
 Bacterial Vaccines 169 
 
 HISTORICAL. . . 169 
 
 METHODS OF ACTIVE IMMUNIZATION 171 
 
 TREATMENT WITH VACCINES 173 
 
 THE VACCINES 174 
 
 DOSES :....' 175 
 
 RESULTS 176 
 
CONTENTS xi 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Leucocyte Extracts in the Treatment of Infec- 
 tions 177 
 
 THEORY 177 
 
 PREPARATION OF THE EXTRACTS 177 
 
 APPLICATION AND RESULTS 173 
 
 Principles Underlying Treatment of Syphilis with 
 
 Salvarsan 179 
 
 PARASITOTROPISM AND ORGANOTROPISM 179 
 
 CHEMORECEPTORS 181 
 
 Appendices 185 
 
 A. THE WASSERMANN TEST FOR SYPHILIS 185 
 
 B. NOGUCHI'S MODIFIED WASSERMANN REACTION 200 
 
 C. BLOOD EXAMINATION PREPARATORY TO TRANS- 
 FUSION 204 
 
 D. THE CONGLUTINATION REACTION 207 
 
 THE MUCH-HOLZMANN COBRA VENOM REACTION . .. 208 
 
 THE MEIOSTAGMIN REACTION 208 
 
 WEIL'S COBRA VENOM TEST IN SYPHILIS 210 
 
 ANTITRYPSIN DETERMINATIONS. .'.. . 212 
 
IMMUNE SERA 
 
 ANTITOXINS 
 
 Historical. The researches of Buchner 1 in 1889 
 had shown that the serum of animals artificially 
 immunized against a certain bacterium possessed 
 marked bactericidal properties for that particular 
 organism. In studying immunity on animals which 
 had been successfully immunized against diphtheria 
 infection, Behring, 2 working in Koch's laboratory 
 was struck by the fact that in these animals 
 living virulent diphtheria bacilli were often demon- 
 strable in the scab at the site of. injection several 
 weeks after the infection, and furthermore that the 
 blood serum of the animals did not possess bacteri- 
 cidal properties. In a study published in 1890 
 Behring showed that the serum of rabbits arti- 
 ficially immunized against diphtheria was able to 
 confer a specific immunity against diphtheria infec- 
 tions in other animals. He also demonstrated that 
 such a serum could be used therapeutically to cure 
 an infection already in progress. Such a serum 
 
 1 Buchner, Centralblatt Bacteriologie, Vol. v, 1889. Archiv. 
 f. Hygiene, Vol. x. 1890. 
 
 2 Behring & Kitasato, Deutsche med. Wochenschrift, No. 
 49, 1890. 
 
 I 
 
2 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 was not bactericidal, and retained its therapeutic 
 power for a considerable time. He believed that 
 the action of the serum was effected by a neu- 
 tralization of the bacterial toxin by an " antitoxic 
 serum constituent." The action was strictly specific, 
 an antitoxic serum obtained after a diphtheria 
 infection protected only against diphtheria; one 
 derived from a tetanus animal, only against tetanus. 
 Subsequently Behring and Knorr showed that im- 
 munization could be effected with bacterial-free 
 filtrates of tetanus cultures and that the serum thus 
 produced protected not only against tetanus 
 infection but against poisoning by the toxic prod- 
 ucts of the bacilli. After considerable experi- 
 mental work Behring and his collaborators devised 
 an effective method of immunizing Lheep and 
 certain other animals against diphtheria and against 
 tetanus and so produced antitoxic sera in con- 
 siderable amounts. 
 
 The following account taken from Park shows the 
 present methods of producing diphtheria antitoxin. 
 
 Production of the Diphtheria Toxin. A strong 
 diphtheria toxin should be obtained by taking a very 
 virulent culture and growing it in broth which is about 
 8 cc. normal soda solution per liter above the neutral 
 point to litmus. The culture fluid should be in com- 
 paratively thin layers and in large-necked Erlenmeyei 
 flasks, so as to allow of a free access of air; the tem- 
 perature should be about 35 to 36 C. The culture, 
 after a weeks growth, is removed from the incubator, 
 
ANTITOXINS 3 
 
 and having been tested for purity by microscopic and 
 culture tests is rendered sterile by the addition of 10 
 per cent of a 5 per cent solution of carbolic acid. After 
 48 hours the dead bacilli have settled on the bottom of 
 the jar and the clear fluid is filtered through ordinary 
 sterile filter paper and stored in full bottles in a 
 cold place until needed. Its strength is then tested by 
 giving a series of guinea pigs carefully measured 
 amounts. Less than o.oi cc. when injected hypoder- 
 mically should kill a 250 gram guinea pig. 
 
 Immunizing the Animals. The horses used should 
 be young, vigorous, of fair size, and absolutely healthy. 
 Vicious habits, such as kicking, etc., make no difference, 
 except, of course, to those who handle the animals. 
 The horses are severally injected with an amount of 
 toxin sufficient to kill five thousand guinea pigs of 250 
 grams weight (about 20 cc. of strong toxin). After 
 from three to five days, so soon as the fever reaction 
 has subsided, a second subcutaneous injection of a 
 slightly larger dose' is given. With the first three 
 injections of toxin 10,000 units of antitoxin are given. 
 If antitoxin is not mixed with the first doses of toxin 
 only one-tenth of the doses advised is to be given. 
 At intervals of from five to eight days increasing injec- 
 tions of pure toxin are made until at the end of two 
 months from ten to twenty times the original amount 
 is given. There is absolutely no way of judging which 
 horses will produce the highest grades of antitoxin. 
 Very roughly those horses which are extremely sensi- 
 tive, and those which react hardly at all are the poorest, 
 but even here there are exceptions. The only way, 
 therefore, is at the end of six weeks or two months to 
 bleed the horses and test their serum. If only high 
 grade serum is wanted all the horses that give less 
 
4 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 than 150 units per cc. are discarded. If moderate 
 grades only are desired, all that yield 100 units may be 
 retained. The retained horses receive steadily in- 
 creasing doses, the rapidity of the increase and the 
 interval of time between the doses (three days to one 
 week) depending somewhat on the reaction following 
 the injection, an elevation of temperature of more than 
 3 F. being undesirable. At the end of three months 
 the antitoxic serum of all the horses should contain 
 over 300 units and in about 10 per cent as much as 800 
 units per'cc. Very few horses ever give over 1000 
 units, and none so far has given as much as 2000 units 
 per cc. The very best horses, if pushed to their 
 limit continue to furnish blood of gradually decreasing 
 strength. If every nine months an interval of three 
 months' freedom from inoculations is given, the best 
 horses furnish high grade serum during their periods of 
 treatment for from two to four years. 
 
 Collecting the Serum. In order to obtain the serum 
 the blood is withdrawn from the jugular vein by means 
 of a sharp-pointed canula which is plunged through the 
 vein wall, a slit having been made in the skin. The 
 blood is carried by a sterile rubber tube attached to the 
 canula, into large Erlenmeyer flasks and allowed to 
 clot, the flasks, however being placed in a slanting 
 position before clotting has commenced. The serum 
 is drawn off after 4 days by means of sterile glass and 
 rubber tubing, and is stored in large flasks in a refrige- 
 rator. From this as needed small vials are filled. 
 The vials and their stoppers, as indeed all the utensils 
 used for holding the serum, must be absolutely sterile 
 and every possible precaution must be taken to avoid 
 contamination of the serum. An antiseptic may be 
 added as a preservative, but is not necessary. Diph- 
 
ANTITOXINS 5 
 
 theria antitoxin, when stored in vials and kept in a cool 
 place away from light and air contains within 10 per 
 cent of its original strength for at least two months; 
 after that it can be used by allowing for a maximum 
 deterioration of 3 per cent for each month. 
 
 Testing the Strength of the Antitoxin. This is carried 
 out as follows: Six guinea pigs .are injected with mix- 
 tures of toxin and antitoxin. In each of the mixtures 
 there is 100 times the amount of a toxin (similar to 
 that adopted as the standard) which will kill a 250 
 grams on an average in 96 hours. In each of the 
 mixtures the amount of antitoxin varies; for instance, 
 No. i would contain 0.002 cc. serum; No. 2, 0.003 cc. ; 
 No. 3, 0.004 cc. ; No. 4, 0.005 cc -> etc - ^ at tne en d f 
 the fourth day Nos. i, 2 and 3 were dead and Nos. 4, 
 5 and 6 were alive we would consider the serum to 
 contain 200 units of antitoxin for each cubic centi- 
 meter. When we mix only ten fatal doses of toxin 
 with one-tenth of the amount of antitoxin used with 
 100 fatal doses, the guinea pig must remain well. The 
 mixed toxin and antitoxin must remain together for 
 fifteen minutes before injecting. 
 
 Behring's publication was followed in the next 
 two years by considerable work along these lines, 
 valuable contributions being made by Aronson, 1 
 Roux, and Martin, 2 Wernicke, 3 Knorr 4 and -others. 
 The statements of Behring as to the strict specifi- 
 city of the antitoxins were fully confirmed. Certain 
 
 1 Berliner med. Gesellschaft, Sitzung, Dec. 21, 1892. Also 
 Berliner Klin. Wochenschrift, 1893 and 1894. 
 3 Roux and Martin, Annal. Pasteur 1894. 
 8 Behring and Wernicke, Zeitsch. Hygiene, 1892. Vol. xi. 
 Behring and Knorr, Zeitsch. f. Hygiene, 1893. Vol. xii. 
 
6 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 observations by Buchner 1 and by Roux and Martin 
 threw doubt, however, on the correctness of Beh- 
 rings view that the toxin was neutralized by the 
 specific serum just as a base was neutralized by an 
 acid. It was claimed, for example, that the specific 
 serum acted mainly on the body cells causing them 
 to become non-susceptible to the poison in question. 
 Various theories were formulated to account for the 
 production of the antitoxins, their specificity, etc., 
 but of them all only one has at all maintained itself. 
 This, is the so-called side-chain theory, which was 
 formulated by Ehrlich 2 in 1897. 
 
 Ehrlich's Side-Chain Theory. Originally the 
 side-chain theory was applied by Ehrlich only to 
 the production of the specific antitoxins, i.e., sub- 
 stances in the blood, which act not only on the 
 living bacteria, but also and especially on their 
 dissolved toxins. Later on he extended it so as 
 to apply also to the formation of specific bacteri- 
 cidal and haemolytic substances in the serum of 
 animals treated with living bacteria or with animal 
 cells. 
 
 Toxins Toxoids Special Function of the Side 
 Chains. The basis of the theory is the fact that 
 poison and counter-poison, toxin and antitoxin, 
 combine directly in any given quantity. This 
 combination always occurs in definite proportions 
 
 1 Buchner, Miinchener med. Wochenschrift, 1894. 
 1 Ehrlich, Klinisches Jahrbuch, 1897. 
 
ANTITOXINS 7 
 
 following the laws of chemical combination; and, 
 still following those laws, is slower at lower tem- 
 peratures than at higher, stronger in concentrate J. 
 than in dilute form. Ehrlich could further show 
 that each poison for which by the process of immun- 
 izing one can develop a counter-poison possesses 
 two groups which are concerned in the combina- 
 tion with the counter-poison or antitoxin. One of 
 these, the so-called haptophore group, is the combin- 
 ing group proper; the other, the toxophore group, 
 is the carrier of the poison. A poison molecule, 
 therefore, might lose the one, the toxophore, and 
 still be capable by means of its haptophore group 
 of combining with antitoxin. Such a modified 
 poison, which because of the loss of the toxophore 
 group can hardly be called a poison, but which still 
 possesses the power to combine with antitoxin, 
 Ehrlich calls a toxoid. Toxoids may be produced 
 spontaneously in old poisons through decomposi- 
 tion of the poison molecule, or they may be pro- 
 duced artificially by causing certain destructive 
 agents such as heat or chemicals to act on bacterial 
 poisons. The toxophore group is a very delicate 
 one and much more readily decomposed than the 
 combining (haptophore) group. Ehrlich reasoned 
 that in order for a poison to be toxic to an organ- 
 ism, i.e., in order that the toxophore group be able 
 to act destructively on a cell, it is necessary for the 
 haptophore group of the poison to combine with 
 
8 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 the cell. IS In every living cell," Ehrlich says, 
 " there must exist a dominating body [Leistungs 
 Kern] and a number of other chemical groups or 
 side chains. These groups have the greatest variety 
 of function, but especially those of nutrition and 
 assimilation." 
 
 The side chains, then, according to this author, 
 
 toxophore group 
 
 , POISON MOLECULE 
 
 FlG. I 
 
 are able to combine with the greatest variety of 
 foreign substances and convert these into nourish- 
 ment suitable to the requirements of the active 
 central body. They are comparable to the pseudo- 
 podia of the lower animals, which engulf food par- 
 ticles and assimilate the same for the immediate 
 use of the organism. In order that any substance 
 
ANTITOXINS 9 
 
 may combine with these side chains it is necessary 
 that certain very definite relations exist between 
 the combining group of the substance and that 
 of the side chain. Using the well-known simile of 
 Emil Fischer, the relation must be like that of lock 
 and key, i.e., the two groups must fit accurately. 
 Hence not every substance will fit all the side 
 chains of an organism. It will combine only with 
 those for which it possesses a fitting group. 
 
 Receptors Weigert's Overproduction Theory. 
 This doctrine of the chemistry of the organism's 
 metabolism Ehrlich applied to the action of toxins 
 and antitoxins. ' The toxin," he said, " can act 
 only when its haptophore group happens to fit to 
 one of the side chains," or receptors, as he now pre- 
 fers to call them. As a result of this combination, 
 the toxophore group is able to act on the cell and 
 injure it. If we take as an example tetanus, in 
 which all the symptoms are due to the central ner- 
 vous system, the side-chain theory assumes that 
 the haptophore group of the tetanus poison fits 
 exactly and is combined with the side chain or 
 receptors of the central nervous system. Other 
 experiments, which we will not reproduce here, 
 have shown us unquestionably that the action of 
 the antitoxins depends on the fact that this com- 
 bines with the haptophore group of the poison and 
 so satisfies the latter 's affinity. Ehrlich, therefore, 
 concluded that the antitoxin is nothing else than 
 
10 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 the side chains or receptors which are given off by 
 the cells and thrust into the circulation. The way 
 in which these side chains or receptors are thrust 
 off as a result of the immunizing process, Ehrlich 
 explains by means of Weigert 1 s Overproduction 
 Theory. 
 
 At the meeting of German Naturalists and 
 Physicians held at Frankfurt in 1896, Weigert * in 
 discussing regeneration, advanced an hypothesis the 
 essential features of which are that physiological 
 structure and function depend upon the equilibrium 
 of the tissues maintained by virtue of mutual 
 restraint between their component cells ; that destruc- 
 tion of a single integer or group of integers of a 
 tissue or a cell removes a corresponding amount of 
 restraint at the point injured, and therefore destroys 
 equilibrium and permits of the abnormal exhibi- 
 tion of bioplastic energies on the part of the remain- 
 ing uninjured components, which activity may be 
 viewed as a compensating hyperplasia; that hyper- 
 plasia is not, therefore, the direct result of external 
 irritation, and cannot be, since the action of the 
 irritant is destructive and is confined to the cells 
 or integers of cells that it destroys, but occurs 
 rather indirectly as a function of the surrounding 
 uninjured tissues that have been excited to bio- 
 plastic activity through the removal of the restraint 
 
 1 Weigert, Verhandlungen der Ges. deutscher Naturforscher 
 iind Aerzte, 1896 
 
ANTITOXINS II 
 
 hitherto exerted by the cells destroyed by the 
 irritant; and, finally, when such bioplastic activity 
 is called into play there is always hypercompen- 
 sation i.e. there is more plastic material gene- 
 rated than is necessary to compensate for the 
 loss. 
 
 Ehrlich points out that owing to the combination 
 of the toxin with the side chain of a cell, these 
 side chains are practically lost to the cell ; that the 
 latter or its fellows now produces new side chains to 
 replace this loss, but that this production always 
 goes so far as to make a surplus of side chains ; that 
 these side chains are thrown off by the cell as 
 unnecessary ballast, and then circulate in the blood 
 as antitoxin. The same substances, therefore, which 
 when part of the cell combine with the haptophore 
 group of the toxin, enabling that to act on the cell, 
 when circulating free in the blood combine with 
 and satisfy this haptophore group of the toxin, 
 and prevent the poison from combining with and 
 damaging the cells of the organism. 
 
 It does not follow from Ehrlich's theory that the 
 antitoxin is produced by the same set of cells whose 
 injury by the toxin gives rise to the particular 
 clinical symptoms. Thus we might believe that 
 although in tetanus the cells of the central nervous 
 s}^stem give rise to the characteristic symptoms, cells 
 entirely apart from these, e.g., in the bone marrow, 
 might be the main source of the antitoxin. The 
 
12 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 fact that we appreciate symptoms from only one 
 organ is, obviously, no proof that other tissues 
 have been unaffected. 
 
 It may be well here to call attention to another 
 rather common misconception regarding the pro- 
 duction of antitoxin, namely that the body cells 
 have to become educated, so to speak, to produce 
 the antitoxin. This, it is believed, is effected by 
 giving gradually increasing doses of toxin. As a 
 matter of fact the reason for this gradual increase 
 in the dose injected is quite different. The object 
 in view is the administration of an enormously 
 large dose of toxin, one that will engage the recep- 
 tors of many cells, The previous injections have 
 brought about some production of antitoxin and 
 this partially neutralizes some of the toxin in- 
 jected, making it possible to give a larger dose than 
 before. If one gives at the outset a large amount of 
 toxin, partially neutralized by antitoxin, one will 
 produce an amount of antitoxin equal to that 
 ordinarily obtained in response to the same quan- 
 tity of unaltered toxin given as the tenth or 
 twentieth injection of a series. Park and Atkinson 
 for example, injected a fresh horse with one litre 
 of a toxin neutralized ij times for guinea pigs. 
 At the end of a week the horse had produced a serum 
 containing 60 units per cc. When the toxin was 
 neutralized 6 fold no antitoxin whatever was pro- 
 duced. 
 
ANTITOXINS 13 
 
 Experimental Evidence for Ehrlictis Theory. 
 According to Ehrlich, then, the formation of specific 
 antibodies must proceed in three stages: 
 
 1. The binding of the haptophore group to the 
 receptor. 
 
 2. The increased production of the receptors 
 following this binding. 
 
 3. The thrusting-off of these increased receptors 
 into the blood. 
 
 So far as the first point is concerned Wassermann * 
 showed that with tetanus, in which, as is well 
 known, all the symptoms are referable to the cen- 
 tral nervous system, tetanus toxin was bound by 
 central nervous system substance in vitro. A 
 mixture of tetanus poison and normal central 
 nervous system was innocuous to animals, showing 
 that certain substances present in the central 
 nervous system combine with and thus satisfy the 
 affinity of the haptophore group of the poison. 
 This of course prevents the latter from combining 
 with any cells of the organism. Organs other than 
 the central nervous system do not possess this 
 property of combining with tetanus poison, just 
 as the central nervous system is, on the contrary, 
 incapable of combining with diphtheria poison, 
 which clinically does not show any pronounced 
 affinity for the central nervous system. 
 
 Wassermann 2 also believes recently to have given 
 
 1 Wassermann and Takaki, Berliner Klin. Wochenschr, 1898, 
 1 Wassermann, New York Medical Journal, 1904. 
 
14 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 experimental proof of the second and third points, 
 the increased production of the receptors and their 
 thrusting off. For this purpose he employed a 
 tetanus poison which he had kept for about eight 
 years, and which was originally very poisonous. 
 In the course of years, however, owing to the 
 damaging action of light, of oxidation, etc., it had 
 become so weak that it was no longer toxic at all. 
 Injections of one cc. into a guinea pig produced 
 no tetanus. Nevertheless the haptophore group 
 remained intact, as could readily be proved, for 
 this non-poisonous tetanus toxin was still able to 
 bind tetanus antitoxin, i.e. thrust-off receptors. On 
 injecting rabbits with this nOn-poisonous tetanus 
 toxoid in increasing doses, and then examining the 
 blood serum of the animal he found not a trace of 
 tetanus antitoxin. This absence could have either 
 of two causes: It might be that the toxoid no 
 longer produced any physiological effect whatever 
 in the organism; or although it still caused an 
 increase in the receptors, these increased receptors 
 remained in the organs (sessile) and were not 
 thrust off into the blood. In order to decide this 
 question Wassermann first determined the exact 
 quantity of fresh tetanus toxin which constituted a 
 fatal dose for guinea pigs. He reasoned that if 
 he injected first the toxoid, and shortly after, say 
 in one or two hours, the fresh toxin, he should in 
 such an animal have to increase the fatal dose, 
 
ANTITOXINS 1 5 
 
 i.e. more tetanus toxin should be required to kill 
 this animal than a normal one, because owing to 
 the previous toxoid injection part of the cells sus- 
 ceptible to tetanus toxin would already have been 
 occupied. Provided Ehrlich's theory were correct, 
 so that this binding of the toxoid really occurred, 
 the conditions should be entirely different when, 
 instead of injecting the toxin shortly after the 
 toxoid, he waited somewhat longer, one to three 
 days, and then injected the fresh tetanus toxin 
 In that case Weigert's law should come into play 
 and the receptors have commenced to increase 
 in number, i.e. the organ should now possess more 
 sensitive groups than before. This would manifest 
 itself in such fashion that in contrast to the first 
 experiment the fatal dose of fresh tetanus toxin 
 could now be decreased ; in other words a small dose 
 would now tetanize the animal in a shorter time. 
 
 As a matter of fact Wassermann's experiments 
 yielded exactly the results deduced theoretically. 
 He injected a guinea pig with some of the non-- 
 poisonous toxoid and then, an hour later, with 
 tetanus toxin. He found that much more toxin 
 was required to kill this animal than a normal 
 guinea pig of equal size. When, on the contrary, 
 he waited one to three days, it was found that then 
 a dose of tetanus toxin which would not even 
 tetanize a normal guinea pig was sufficient to kill 
 this one. 
 
16 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 It will be seen that in the above experiments 
 the completely non-poisonous toxoid, although it 
 effected an increased production of receptors, did 
 not cause their thrusting-off. The serum of the 
 rabbit treated with toxoid contained no antitoxin 
 whatever. Wassermann concludes from this and 
 other experiments that the thrusting-off cannot be 
 a function of the haptophore group, and that 
 something additional is required. This " some- 
 thing," he claims is a function of the toxophore 
 group. It may be stated that Von Dungern has 
 also published experiments (with majaplasm) point- 
 ing to the existence of the second stage, the stage of 
 sessile receptors. 
 
 Antigens or Haptins. It has been found that 
 it is impossible to produce any immunity against 
 all poisons, e.g. strychnine or morphine. Accord- 
 ing to Ehrlich these simpler chemical molecules do 
 not enter into a true chemical combination with 
 the tissues, but form rather a kind of solid solution, 
 a loose combination with the cells, so that they can 
 again be abstracted from these cells by all kinds of 
 solvents, e.g. by shaking out with ether or chloro- 
 form. The point can perhaps be likened to the 
 difference between saccharin and sugar. Both sub- 
 stances taste sweet, but despite this similarity in 
 their physiological action they behave very dif- 
 ferently toward the cells of the organism. Sac- 
 charin simply passes through the organism without 
 
ANTITOXINS 17 
 
 entering into a firm combination, i.e. without being 
 assimilated, and is therefore no food. Its sweeten- 
 ing action is a mere contact effect on the cells 
 sensitive to taste. Sugar, on the contrary, is 
 actually bound by the cells, assimilated and burnt, 
 and so is a true food. Until recently it was believed 
 that the simpler chemical substances could not 
 excite the production of antibodies. Ford and 
 Abel 1 have however been able to show that toad 
 stool poison, a true toxin, against which an anti- 
 toxin can be produced is chemically a glucoside. 
 
 As we shall subsequently see it is possible to 
 immunize the animal body against a large number 
 of substances, including not only such cell products 
 as ferments, toxins and venoms, but also cells of 
 the greatest variety, bacteria, dissolved proteids, etc. 
 All these substances, therefore, must possess hapto- 
 phore groups able to combine with the side chains 
 or receptors in the animal body. Collectively, 
 we speak of such substances as antigens or haptins. 
 
 Nature of Antitoxins in General. But little is 
 known concerning the constitution of antitoxins, 
 for we do not know them apart from serum or 
 serum constituents. It seems probable that they 
 are proteid in character, but this has not been 
 positively decided. It has been found that like 
 the globulins they are quite resistant to the action 
 of trypsin, but are acted on by pepsin-hydrochloric 
 
 1 Ford and Abel, Journal of Biological Chemistry, Vol. ii, 1907 
 
1 8 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 acid. In general they withstand a fair degree of 
 heat, certainly far more than the toxins. Anti- 
 toxins are to be regarded as inactive substances, 
 effecting merely a blocking of the haptophore 
 group of the corresponding toxin. They do not 
 act on the toxins destructively. This is indicated 
 by experiments of Wassermann on pyocyaneus toxin, 
 and of Calmette and Morgenroth 1 on snake venom, 
 which showed that in the toxin-antitoxin com- 
 bination, the toxin could again manifest itself after 
 the antitoxin had been destroyed. The antitoxins 
 therefore are not ferment-like substances. As far 
 back as 1897 attempts were made to determine the 
 chemical nature of the antitoxins. In that year 
 Belfanti and Carbone 2 found that the antitoxin 
 was precipitated with the globulins of the serum by 
 means of magnesium sulphate. Dieudonne 3 had 
 previously shown that the proteids thrown out of 
 solution by acetic and carbonic acids contained 
 none of the antitoxin. In 1901 Atkinson 4 showed 
 that the globulins increase markedly in the serum 
 of horses as the antitoxic strength increases. The 
 most recent work on this subject is that of Gibson, 5 
 who shows that if the ammonium sulphate precipi- 
 
 1 Morgenroth, Berlin, klin. Wochenschr. 1905. 
 
 2 Beifanti and Carbone, Centralblatt Bacteriologie (Ref.), 
 Vol. xxiii, 1898. 
 
 3 Dieudonne, Arbeiten a.d. kaiserl. Gesundheitsamte. VoL 
 xiii, 1897. 
 
 4 Atkinson, Jour. Exper. Medicine, Vol. i, 1901. 
 
 5 Gibson, Journ. Biological Chemistry, Vol. i, 1906. 
 
ANTITOXINS 1 9 
 
 tate (globulins, nucleo-proteids, etc.) is treated with 
 saturated sodium chloride solution, practically all 
 the antitoxic fraction passes into solution. Gibson's 
 was the first really practicable method of concentrat- 
 ing the antitoxin. By means of it solutions of 
 antitoxic globulin could easily be made to contain 
 1500 units per cc. Continuing Gibson's work, 
 Banzhaf discovered that if the antitoxic serum or 
 plasma was heated to 57 for 18 hours, there was 
 a change of a considerable portion of the soluble 
 globulins (soluble in Nad solution) into insoluble 
 globulins. The antitoxin remained unchanged. 
 This procedure, therefore, permits of a still greater 
 elimination of the non-antitoxic proteids. 
 
 Gibson has recently studied the possibility of 
 differentiating other antibodies by means of their 
 precipitation characteristics. He believes that a 
 differentiation of the antibodies into those precip- 
 itated with the pseudo globulins and with the 
 euglobulin fractions, according to the Hofmeister 
 classification, is based on a misconception of the 
 application of ammonium sulphate in separating 
 proteids by their precipitation characters. While 
 there seem to be some differences in the dis- 
 tribution of the antibodies in individual specific 
 sera in comparative experiments, this is not so 
 absolute as maintained by Pick l and others. Gib- 
 son's work on the fractionating of poly agglutina- 
 
 1 Pick, Beitiage z. chem. PhysioL u- PathoL, VoL i, 1901. 
 
20 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 tive serum shows that no separation of the several 
 antibodies developed in an individual serum is 
 possible. In the case of antitoxic sera both Gibson 
 and Ledingham find that in goat serum the antitoxin 
 is not invariably associated with the euglobulin 
 fraction as maintained by Pick, but shows the same 
 solubilities as that in horse serum. 
 
 Toxins and other Poisonous Cell Derivatives, in 
 General. Soon after bacteriology had demon- 
 strated the etiological connection between bacteria 
 and disease, the conviction gained ground that it 
 was less the actual destruction wrought by the 
 bacteria directly, than the injury produced by their 
 chemical products that gave rise to the lesions in 
 the infectious diseases. Brieger, especially, was 
 one of the first to direct attention to the probable 
 existence of specific poisons in the bacteria. He 
 isolated a number of well defined chemical sub- 
 stances called ptomaines, most of which were highly 
 toxic. Subsequent study, however, showed that 
 these were not the specific bacterial poisons. The 
 latter, the true toxins are something quite different 
 as we shall see in a moment. Still later other 
 substances were isolated from bacteria, and these 
 were termed toxalbumins. We now know that 
 some of these were identical with the true toxins, 
 but that others were entirely unrelated. 
 
 What then are the true toxins? A number of 
 pathogenic bacteria, when grown in pure culture, 
 
ANTITOXINS 21 
 
 produce dissolved poisons in the culture fluid. 
 These poisons are neither ptomaines nor proteid 
 substances; their chemical nature is still absolutely 
 unknown. They are extremely sensitive to exter- 
 nal influences, especially against heat, and in many 
 ways are very analogous to ferments. Physio- 
 logically the toxins are extremely poisonous, far 
 beyond that of any of the ordinary' well known 
 poisons, and this poisonous action manifests itself 
 only after a certain latent period known as the 
 period of incubation. Finally one of the funda- 
 mental properties of the toxins is their ability 
 to excite, in the organism attacked, antitoxins 
 directed specifically against them, so that for every 
 true toxin there is a corresponding antitoxin. 
 
 In addition to these bacterial toxins we know 
 of other poisonous substances possessing similar 
 characteristics. Among these are the " zootoxins," 
 - snake venoms, spider and toad poisons, the 
 toxin of eel blood, and the " phytotoxins," 
 ricin, crotin, abrin, etc. It may be mentioned that 
 some of these are of somewhat more complex con- 
 stitution than the ordinary bacterial toxins. Ricin, 
 for example, appears to possess one haptophore 
 group but two ergophore groups, a toxic and an 
 agglutinating one. In the case of the snake 
 venoms it is not yet definitely known whether 
 they are haptins of the first order or of the 
 second. (See page 49.) 
 
22 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 The Relations Existing between Toxin and Anti- 
 toxin. The exact nature of the toxin-antitoxin 
 reaction has long been the subject of study and has 
 given rise to considerable discussion. For obvious 
 reasons most of the work has been done with 
 diphtheria and tetanus toxins and their antitoxins. 
 In order to give the reader some conception of 
 the diverging views of various authorities we shall 
 devote a few pages to a brief study of ths diphtheria 
 toxin-antitoxin reaction. 
 
 During the earlier years of toxin-antitoxin in- 
 vestigations the filtered or sterilized bouillon, in 
 which the diphtheria bacillus had grown and pro- 
 duced its " toxin," was supposed to require for 
 its neutralization an amount of antitoxin directly 
 proportional to its toxicity as tested in guinea pigs. 
 Thus, if from one bouillon culture ten fatal doses 
 of " toxin" were required to neutralize a certain 
 quantity of antitoxin, it was believed that ten 
 fatal doses from every culture, without regard to 
 ths way in which it had been produced or preserved, 
 would also neutralize the same amount of antitoxin. 
 Upon this belief was founded the Behring-Ehrlich 
 definition of an antitoxin unit. 1 
 
 The results of tests by different experimenters 
 of the same antitoxic serum, but with different diph- 
 
 1 This unit was " ten times the amount of antitoxic serum 
 necessary to just protect a 250 gramme guinea pig against 
 ten fatal doses of the toxin " 
 
ANTITOXINS 
 
 theria toxins, proved this opinion to be incorrect. 
 Ehrlich 1 deserves the credit for first clearly per- 
 ceiving and calling attention to this fact. He 
 obtained from various sources twelve toxins and 
 compared their neutralizing value upon antitoxin; 
 these tests gave interesting and important in- 
 formation. The following table gives the results 
 in four of his toxins and well illustrates the point in 
 question : 
 
 
 
 Smallest num- 
 
 Fatal doses re- 
 
 
 
 
 
 ber of fatal 
 doses of toxic 
 
 quired to 
 " completely 
 
 
 
 
 Estimated 
 
 bouillon re- 
 
 neutralize " one 
 
 L+ minus 
 
 
 Serial 
 
 minimal fatal 
 
 quired to kill a 
 
 antitoxin unit 
 
 
 
 Num- 
 ber. 
 
 dose for 
 250 gm. 
 guinea pigs. 
 
 2sogm. guinea 
 pig within 
 5 days when 
 mixed with one 
 
 as determined 
 by the health 
 of the guinea 
 pig remaining 
 
 L(> in 
 fatal 
 doses. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 
 
 antitoxin unit. 
 
 unaffected. 
 
 
 
 
 
 ("L t Ehrlich.") 
 
 (" LO Ehrlich.") 
 
 
 
 A 
 
 o . 009 cc. 
 
 39-4 
 
 33-4 
 
 6 
 
 Old; deterio- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 rated from 0.003 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ;o o. 009. 
 
 B 
 
 0.0165 cc 
 
 76.3 
 
 54-4 
 
 22 
 
 Fresh toxin, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 preserved with 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 :ricresol. 
 
 C 
 
 o. 039 cc. 
 
 123. 
 
 108. 
 
 15 
 
 A numbei of 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 "resh cultures, 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 grown at 37 C. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 four and eight 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 days. 
 
 D 
 
 0.0025 cc. 
 
 100 
 
 5 
 
 5 
 
 Tested immedi- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ately after its 
 
 
 x 
 
 
 
 
 withdrawal. 
 
 It was natural to suppose, as the early investi- 
 gators did, that a just neutral mixture of toxin and 
 
 1 Ehrlich, Die Werthbemessung des Diphtherieheilserums. 
 Klinisches Jahrbuch, 1897. 
 
24 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 antitoxin, would require the addition of but one 
 fatal dose of toxin in order to regularly kill the test 
 animal. In the above table, however, we see that 
 this difference ranges from six to fifty fatal doses. 
 
 Partial Saturation Method - - Toxons, Toxoids. 
 Ehrlich obtained considerable additional informa- 
 tion by means of his " partial saturation " method. 
 Certain experiments had led him to believe that the 
 original antitoxin on which he had based his " unit " 
 determinations, while able to neutralize 100 fatal 
 doses (per unit) really represented 200 " binding 
 units," and that the toxic bouillon really contained 
 several kinds of poisonous substances able to com- 
 bine with antitoxin. 
 
 He now believes that the diphtheria bacilli excrete 
 at least two such poisons, " toxins " and " toxons ; " 
 that these very quickly decompose to a greater or 
 less extent forming various " toxoids." 
 
 In the case of a hypothetically pure toxin Ehrlich 
 believes that one antitoxic unit would correspond 
 to 200 fatal doses or 200 binding units. If the 
 entire amount of antitoxin, i.e. | is added to 
 the amount of toxin in question, the result will be 
 just complete neutralization. If the toxin is entirely 
 pure, ^{jf of the antitoxin unit would neutralize all 
 but ?hu of the initial toxicity and M&, or ?$% or ^A, 
 etc. of the antitoxin added would permit correspond- 
 ing degrees of toxicity to be demonstrated through 
 animal inoculations. It was found, however, that 
 neutralization according to this simple scale did not 
 
ANTITOXINS 2 5 
 
 take place. The results were complicated andEhrlich 
 found it convenient to express them graphically in 
 the form of the so-called "toxin spectra. " Without 
 
 10 20 30 40 
 
 Toxon 
 
 70 80 90 100 
 
 150 
 
 200 
 
 FlG. 2. 
 
 going much deeper into the subject the point maybe 
 illustrated by the appended diagrams or " spectra." 
 
 Fig. 2 shows the simplest conceivable diphtheria 
 poison. In this case the following values would 
 be obtained. 
 
 # cc poison (100 fatal doses) + f antitoxin 
 units = o, i.e. absolutely neutral. 
 
 # cc poison + iffft = Free toxon. 
 
 # cc poison + *{} = Free toxon. 
 
 That is to say, if the proportion of antitoxin added 
 was Mti of the amount required for complete 
 neutralization, it would be found that the poison 
 thus uncombined was much less, and differently 
 toxic than a corresponding amount of the original 
 toxin. It was found that these fractions possessed 
 a rather constant though low degree of toxicity 
 with characteristic action. This consisted in the 
 production of some local oedema, followed by a 
 long incubation period, and finally the develop- 
 ment of cachexia and paralysis. Ehrlich believes 
 
26 
 
 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 that this action is due to a separate poison excreted 
 by the diphtheria bacillus which he calls a toxon. 
 
 If we continue with the above poison we shall 
 obtain these values: 
 
 # cc poison + ^ = Toxin action (i fatal dose). 
 
 # cc poison + sVu =30 fatal doses. 
 
 x cc poison + sVk = 90 fatal doses, etc. 
 
 That is to say, if we add only $fo units antitoxin, 
 i.e. sitf unit less than in the JH mixture, we find 
 that one fatal dose is set free. This relation would 
 exist right to the end. The fact that in this experi- 
 ment the toxins are liberated after the toxons, 
 shows that the toxons have less affinity for the anti- 
 toxin than have the toxins. 
 
 As a matter of fact, however, conditions are prob- 
 ably never as simple as this. In the process of 
 toxin formation a double action is always going 
 on that of toxin and toxon production, and that 
 of their decomposition. As was pointed out on 
 a previous page the poisons quickly change into 
 non-poisonous toxoids, and these substances are 
 still able to bind antitoxin. 
 
 This is shown in the following " spectrum." 
 
 Protoxoid 
 
 10 20 30 40 50 60 
 
 1GO 
 
 FIG. 3. 
 
 Toxon 
 
 150 160 
 
ANTITOXINS 
 
 Here we would obtain the following figures: 
 
 2 7 
 
 # cc poison -f 
 lutely neutral. 
 
 # cc poison + 
 
 # cc poison + 
 
 # cc poison -f 
 
 oo poison + 
 
 oc cc poison + 
 
 antitoxin unit = o, i.e. abso- 
 
 = Toxon free. 
 = Toxon free. 
 
 = Toxin free (i fatal dose.) 
 - Toxin free (60 fatal doses. ) 
 = Toxin free (100 fatal doses.) 
 Now we come to the non-poisonous "prototoxoids" : 
 # cc + inm = Toxin free(ioo fatal doses.) 
 # cc + *oo = Toxin free (100 fatal doses.) 
 x cc + sio = Toxin free (100 fatal doses.) 
 We see here that after we have reduced the 
 antitoxin to ^ no further increase of toxicity is 
 brought about by any further reductions. Ehrlich 
 calls these toxoids " prototoxoids " because they 
 have such a high affinity for the antitoxin. But 
 there are apparently still other toxoids, as is shown 
 by the following spectrum: 
 
 Protoxoid 
 
 Syntoxoid 
 
 Toxon 
 
 ' 100 ' 10 ' '200 
 
 FIG. 4. 
 
 Here we would obtain values as follows: 
 x cc poison -f- f $% = o, i.e. absolutely neutral. 
 x ce poison -f iol = Toxon. 
 
28 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 x cc poison 4- M<! = Toxin free (i fatal dose). 
 
 oc cc poison + Mf = Toxin free ( 2 fatal doses.) 
 
 x cc poison 4- ^B = Toxon free (30 fatal doses.) 
 
 Here we find that in the middle part of the 
 " spectrum " we encounter a zone in which each ^"o 
 antitoxin unit neutralizes one fatal dose. Ehrlich 
 believes that this part of the mixture consists of 
 equal parts of syntoxoid and toxin that is to 
 say, he believes there are also toxoids which 
 have the same degree of affinity for antitoxin 
 that this toxin has. He speaks of these as " syn- 
 toxoids." 
 
 By following out this conception of the toxin- 
 antitoxin combination, Ehrlich comes to the con- 
 clusion that diphtheria poison is a very complex 
 substance, containing toxin, toxon, and perhaps still 
 other primary secretion products in addition to the 
 various secondary modifications of these, toxoids, 
 toxonoids, etc. It is difficult to escape the feeling 
 that the existence of some of these hypothetical 
 substances is more apparent than real. 
 
 Views of Arrhenius, Bar del and Others. Bordet 
 and others refuse to accept Ehrlich 's views and 
 the whole matter is still unsettled. Thus the exist- 
 ence or non-existence of toxons has excited a great 
 deal of discussion among investigators. 
 
 The great Swedish chemist, Arrhenius, has given 
 much attention to the toxins; and has applied 
 the principles of physical chemistry to the toxin- 
 
ANTITOXINS 
 
 29 
 
 antitoxin reaction. It is, of course, well known 
 that a solution of a compound such as sodium 
 chloride represents not only NaCl in solution, 
 but also sodium ions and chlorine ions. There is 
 a certain amount of dissociation going on hand in 
 hand with a combination of the two components. 
 The degree of this varies with the temperature and 
 the dilution of the substances. Arrhenius believes 
 that the same process goes on with the toxin- 
 antitoxin combination and that such more or less 
 dissociated compounds give rise 'to the effects 
 Ehrlich ascribes to the toxon. There is, however, 
 no direct evidence that the combination of toxin- 
 antitoxin is reversible. It is true that Morgenroth 
 has been able to dissociate the two components of 
 a neutral mixture of cobra venom and its antitoxin. 
 But even here we are not dealing with a reversible 
 reaction, for it requires certain manipulations to 
 disrupt the neutral combination. In their work 
 on the toxin of symptomatic anthrax, Grassberger 
 and Schattenfroh found that different mixtures 
 were obtained, depending on whether they mixed 
 the toxin and antitoxin after diluting them, or 
 diluted the toxin-antitoxin mixture. This fact 
 is not in favor of Arrhenius' theory, for according 
 to that, the same state of equilibrium should exist 
 in both instances owing to reversibility, and the 
 same fraction of the toxin of necessity remain 
 free. 
 
30 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 Bordet * believes that the neutralization of toxin 
 by antitoxin is an adsorption phenomenon, and 
 compares it with the process of dyeing. The 
 molecules of the toxin would " stain " more or less 
 deeply by the antitoxin molecule, and the com- 
 plexes that result in the various instances would 
 be less toxic in proportion as they contained more 
 antitoxin and less toxin. If a large piece of filter 
 paper is placed in a certain volume of sufficiently 
 diluted dye, it takes a uniform shade of intensity; 
 if, on the other hand, the same sized piece of paper 
 is cut in pieces and added in fragments, the first 
 pieces are stained deeply, and the last find no color 
 left. In the same way, on adding toxin to antitoxin 
 in divided doses, the last portions of the poison 
 cannot be neutralized, as the first are supersatu- 
 rated with antitoxin. When the entire mixture 
 is made at once, on the contrary, the antitoxin is 
 spread all over the toxin molecules and a complex 
 is obtained which contains an even proportion of 
 the antidote, and which, consequently, is not as 
 fatal as even a small dose of free toxin. The action 
 which Ehrlich therefore ascribes to toxons, Bordet 
 refers to toxin which is partially saturated with 
 antitoxin. Bordet also cites the researches of 
 Grassberger and Schattenfroh on the toxin of 
 symptomatic anthrax. The toxic fluid which these 
 
 1 Bordet-Gay, Collected Studies in Immunity, Wiley & Sons, 
 1909. 
 
ANTITOXINS 3I 
 
 authors employed contains only a single poison: 
 there is no reason for assuming the existence of 
 toxoids, inasmuch as the toxic power of the poison 
 is constantly parallel to its neutralizing power for 
 antitoxin. On mixing a certain dose of the toxin 
 either with little or with much antitoxin, complexes 
 of toxin-antitoxin were obtained which varied 
 in their reaction to heat. Moreover, these authors 
 found that their poison absorbs much more anti- 
 toxin than is necessary to destroy its entire toxicity, 
 and forms a stable compound with it. Bordet's con- 
 ception of the toxin-antitoxin reaction thus seems 
 to be very simple. The main difficulty which it 
 encounters is the strict specificity of the combi- 
 nation. However, recent investigations make it 
 probable that the affinity of adsorption is similar 
 to a true chemical affinity, in that both are elective. 
 It is possible, therefore, that the existence of strict 
 specificity may still be found entirely compatible 
 with the adsorption theory. 
 
AGGLUTININS 
 
 The Agglutination Phenomenon. We have just 
 seen that pathogenic bacteria may be divided into 
 those which produce extracellular toxins in culture 
 media, and those which do not. Against the 
 former the organism defends itself by the production 
 of antitoxins ; against the latter it produces a variety 
 of antibodies : bacteriolysins, agglutinins, precipi- 
 tins, opsonins and possibly others. 
 
 The agglutinins can be observed either in a test- 
 tube or in a microscopical preparation. For example, 
 if typhoid or cholera immune sera are added respec- 
 tively to a 24-hour culture of typhoid or cholera 
 bacilli, and the mixture placed in a thermostat, 
 the following phenomenon will be noticed: The 
 bacteria which previously clouded the bouillon 
 uniformly, clump together into little masses, settle 
 to the sides of the test-tub 2 and gradually fall to 
 the bottom until the fluid is almost entirely clear. 
 In a control test, on the contrary, to which no active 
 serum is added, the fluid remains uniformly cloudy. 
 The reaction is completed in twenty-four hours 
 at the most. If the reaction is observed in a hang- 
 ing drop, it is seen that the addition of the active 
 
 serum first produces an increased motility of the 
 
 32 
 
AGGLUTIN1NS 33 
 
 bacteria which lasts a short time and is followed 
 by a gradual formation of clumps. One gets the 
 impression that the bacteria are dying together. 
 Frequently one sees bacteria which have recently 
 joined a group make violent motions as though they 
 were attempting to tear themselves away; then 
 they gradually lose their motility completely. Even 
 the larger groups of bacteria may exhibit movement 
 as a whole. After not more than one or two hours 
 the reaction is completed; in place of the bacteria 
 moving quickly across the field, one sees one or 
 several groups of absolutely immobile bacilli. Now 
 and then in a number of preparations one sees 
 a few separate bacteria still moving about among 
 the groups. If the reaction is feeble, either because 
 the immune serum has been strongly diluted or 
 because it contains very little agglutinin, the groups 
 are small and one finds comparatively many iso- 
 lated and perhaps also moving bacteria. It is 
 essential each time to make a control test of the 
 same bacterial culture withoiit the addition of 
 serum. Under some circumstances the reaction 
 proceeds with extraordinary rapidity so that the 
 bacilli are clumped almost immediately. By the 
 time the microscopical slide has been prepared 
 and brought into view nothing is to be seen 
 of any moving or isolated bacteria, and only by 
 means of the control test is it t possible to tell 
 whether the culture possessed normal motility. 
 
34 IMMUXE SERA 
 
 We are not yet informed as to the nature of these 
 phenomena. A number of theories have been ad- 
 vanced, into which, however, we cannot here enter. 
 
 In some cases the agglutinins are active even in 
 very high dilutions. Thus in typhoid patients 
 and typhoid convalescents a distinct agglutination 
 has been observed in dilutions of i : 5000, and this 
 action persisted for years, though not, of course, 
 in the same degree. Even normal blood-serum, 
 when undiluted, often produces agglutination. But 
 the above specific agglutinins, which do not exist 
 beforehand, being formed only in consequence of 
 an infection, are characterized by this, that the 
 agglutination occurs even when the serum is diluted 
 (at least i : 30 to i : 50), and, furthermore, that after 
 this dilution the action is still specific, i.e. cholera 
 immune serum agglutinates only cholera bacilli, 
 typhoid immune serum only typhoid bacilli, etc. 
 This specificity, however, as will be shown later, 
 is not always absolute. 
 
 Agglutinins can also be developed against red 
 blood cells and against certain protozoa (trypan- 
 osomes). We speak of iha former as hamag- 
 glutinins. Analogous to the hsemolytic action or 
 normal serum on the red cells of certain other 
 species, we find that normal serum is able to 
 agglutinate the red cells of many species and bac- 
 teria. For example, normal goat serum aggluti- 
 nates the red cells of man, pigeon, and rabbit; 
 
AGGLUTININS 35 
 
 normal rabbit serum agglutinates typhoid and 
 cholera bacilli. 
 
 Of practical interest is the fact that normal serum 
 may agglutinate the red blood cells of another indi- 
 vidual of the same species. Following Ehrlich's nomen- 
 clature, we speak of this as is o agglutination. The 
 subject has been studied by a number of investigators, 
 and mostly in human blood. According to the extensive 
 investigations of Moss, isoagglutinins occur in the serum 
 of about 90% of adult human beings. Landsteiner 
 divided the individuals into three groups, namely : 
 
 Group i. The corpuscles are not agglutinated by 
 sera of the other two groups, while the sera agglu- 
 tinate the corpuscles of both groups. 
 
 Group 2. The corpuscles are agglutinated by the 
 sera of the other two groups, while the sera agglutinate 
 the corpuscles of Group 3, but not of Group i. 
 
 Group 3. The corpuscles are agglutinated by the 
 other two sera, and the sera agglutinate the corpuscles 
 of Group 2, but not of Group i. 
 
 An examination of this grouping shows that in no 
 case is there an agglutination of erythrocytes by their 
 own serum, in other words these are isoagglutinins but 
 not autoagglutinins. A somewhat different classification 
 was made by Jansky, and independently of him also by 
 Moss. Both these authors find it necessary to establish 
 four groups in order to embrace all the cases met with. 
 
 Gay calls attention to the fact that the clumping of 
 erythrocytes by serum is not necessarily due to the pres- 
 ence of an agglutinin at all, but may be due to variations 
 in the molecular concentration of the serum constituents 
 or of the constituents of the blood cells. Whatever finally 
 proves to be the correct explanation, it is obvious that 
 the occurrence of isoagglutination in human blood might 
 
36 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 possibly prove disastrous in human homologous trans- 
 fusion. For this reason it is now common practice to 
 always precede homologous transfusion by an examina- 
 tion of the blood of both donor and recipient. A brief 
 outline of these tests is given in the appendix. 
 
 Purpose of Agglutination. It is not yet clear 
 what the purpose, if any, of ths agglutinating 
 function is. Gruber, the first to thoroughly study 
 and appreciate the bacterial agglutinins, assumes 
 that the process injures the affected cell, preparing 
 it for solution and destruction. After numerous 
 experiments I have not been able to convince 
 myself of any damaging influence of the agglutinins 
 on the affected cell, be this blood cell or bacterium, 
 and the observations of other authors confirm this 
 opinion. Agglutinated bacteria are capable of 
 living and of reproduction, and agglutinated red 
 blood cells are no more fragile or easier to destroy 
 than normal, non-agglutinated cells. Neither can 
 anything be discovered microscopically which would 
 indicate any injury to their structure. 
 
 One thing is certain: that the agglutinins are in 
 no way related to the lysins found in serum, and 
 so of course are not identical with these. The 
 simultaneous occurrence in a serum of immune 
 bodies, interbodies, complements, and agglutinins 
 is an entirely independent phenomenon which is 
 in no way regular. There are sera which dissolve 
 certain cells without agglutinating them, and others 
 which agglutinate cells without dissolving them. 
 
AGGLUTININS 37 
 
 Historical Serum diagnosis by means of the 
 
 agglutinins was introduced chiefly through the 
 labors of Gruber and Widal. The studies under- 
 taken by Gruber and his pupil Durham began as 
 early as 1894. At the Congress for Internal Medi- 
 cine in 1896 l Gruber first announced that he had 
 discovered the reaction in typhoid convalescents, 
 and asked that his observations be verified if pos- 
 sible. Soon after this Pfeiffer and his co-workers 
 published a study which confirmed Gruber's results. 2 
 The significance of the reaction as a diagnostic 
 help was unquestionably first pointed out by Widal, 3 
 who showed that the reaction appears at a relatively 
 early period of the disease, and may therefore be 
 employed as a diagnostic measure. We must not 
 omit to state that Griinbaum 4 in March, 1896, several 
 months before Widal's publication, had also grasped 
 the significance of the reaction as a diagnostic 
 measure. Owing to insufficient clinical material 
 his publication did not appear until some time after 
 Widal's. Hence, in acknowledgment of the labors 
 of the two authors most concerned in the discovery 
 and introduction of this reaction, we now speak 
 
 1 Transactions of the Congress, edited by E. von Leyden and 
 R. Pfeiffer, Wiesbaden, 1896. 
 
 2 Pfeiffer and Kolle, Deutsche med. Wochenschrift, 1896, 
 No. 12. 
 
 3 Widal, Bulletin de la soc. mdd. des hop., June 26, 1896. 
 
 4 Grunbaum, Lancet, Sept. 19, 1896; Muench. med. Wochen- 
 schrift, 1897, No. 13; Blood and the identification of bacterial 
 species, Science Progress, Vol. I, No. 5, 1897. 
 
38 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 of it as the "Gruber-Widal reaction," whereas in 
 the beginning only the term " Widal reaction " 
 was used. 
 
 The manner in which the reaction proceeds in 
 microscopical preparations as well as when mac- 
 roscopically observed has been described above 
 (page 32). Nowadays the microscopic method is 
 given the preference x because in many cases it is 
 distinct when the macroscopic reaction fails; and 
 further because the former yields distinct results 
 within an hour at the most, whereas in many cases 
 twenty-four hours are required for the macroscopic 
 test. 
 
 Pfaundler's Reaction (Thread Reaction). It 
 may be well at this point to call attention to a 
 peculiar reaction described by Pfaundler 2 in 1896. 
 This author showed that certain bacteria, though 
 they might not be agglutinated by a given serum, 
 would often, when they were grown therein, develop 
 in the form of long threads more or less interlaced. 
 This occurred only in the specific serum and wa 
 absent in the normal serum. Most authorities 
 regard the thread reaction as a manifestation of 
 agglutinins. According to Metchnikoff this reaction 
 sometimes gives more information concerning a 
 serum than does the ordinary agglutination test. 
 
 1 This applies to typhoid ; in other diseases the macroscopic 
 method is sometimes preferable, 
 
 '* Pfaundler, Centralblatt Bacteriologie, Vol. xix, 1896. 
 
AGGLUTININS 
 
 39 
 
 Nature of the Agglutinins, and of the Agglutina- 
 tion Reaction. The agglutinins are fairly resistant 
 substances which withstand heating to 60 C., and 
 lose their power only on heating to 65 C. It is pos- 
 sible, therefore, to make a serum bacteriolytically in- 
 active by heating to 5 5 C., and still preserve its agglu- 
 tinating power. It has been found that agglutinins 
 when heated may keep the property of uniting 
 with bacteria, although they lose the property of 
 agglutinating them. To explain this fact, Ehrlich 
 supposes that agglutinins possess two groups, a 
 haptophore group, effecting the specific union with 
 the cell, and an ergophore group, which effects the 
 clumping. He supposes further that under the con- 
 ditions mentioned the agglutinin loses its aggluti- 
 nating group but keeps its combining group. Such 
 a modified agglutinin Ehrlich calls an agglutinoid, 
 just as toxins which have lost their toxophore 
 groups are called toxoids. The nature of agglutinoid, 
 however, is still very obscure. In fact, as we shall 
 presently see, the opponents of the Ehrlich school 
 refuse to believe in the existence of agglutinoids. 
 It has occasionally been observed that agglutination 
 is absent in concentrated serum, and present in dilute 
 serum. This zone of no agglutination, preceding that 
 of agglutination, is often spoken of as the pro zone 
 and was first described by Eisenberg and Volk. Ac- 
 cording to Ehrlich. it is due to the presence in the 
 serum of agglutinoids. These are assumed to possess 
 higher affinity for the bacteria than do the agglutinins 
 
4 o IMMUNE SERA 
 
 and so prevent the latter from acting on the bacteria. 
 Since, however, the agglutinins are usually far more 
 abundant than the agglutinoids, dilution of the serum 
 dilutes the latter to practically nothing, thus allow- 
 ing the agglutinins to combine with the bacteria. 
 
 Ehrlich's conception of the structure of the agglu- 
 tinin molecule and his views on the nature of the 
 agglutination reaction have been sharply combated. 
 
 Elser very properly points out that not enough 
 attention has been paid to the effect of heat on serum, 
 and that alterations in the physical characters of the 
 serum may be sufficient to account for phenomena 
 heretofore ascribed to chemical changes. Among 
 other things he cites the effect of heat on horse serum ; 
 heating produces a marked increase in the viscosity 
 of the serum. It is obvious, therefore, when heated 
 sera are used in agglutination experiments, that this 
 purely physical characteristic exerts a profound in- 
 fluence on the result of the reaction. Differences in 
 the behavior of an agglutinating serum before and 
 after heating must therefore be interpreted with great 
 caution, and must not at once be taken to indicate 
 the chemical alteration of the agglutinin complex. 
 
 Bordet, for example, cites an interesting experi- 
 ment of Gengou. An aqueous solution of agar, 
 so diluted as to be only slightly viscous at room 
 temperature, agglutinates barium sulphate sus- 
 pended in water. Heating such a solution destroys 
 this property without affecting the adsorbing 
 property; under these conditions it produces the 
 
AGGLUTININS 4 ! 
 
 opposite effect, namely, disseminates the particles 
 of barium and gives a milky appearance to the 
 fluid. Can we, says Bordet, claim that by heating 
 this solution we have caused it to lose its agglu- 
 tinating group? Bordet agrees with Forges, who 
 believes that the hypothesis of such a group in the 
 antibody molecule has no foundation. Forges 
 found, on studying the effect of heat on the agglu- 
 tinating power of the albuminous substances of 
 serum for mastic emulsions, that he could obtain 
 results entirely similar to those that have been 
 noted for agglutinins. Bordet insists that we have 
 no right to localize the cause of agglutination in a 
 molecule of the antibody rather than in one of the 
 antigen. The hypothesis of a functional group in 
 the molecule of the .agglutinin, he says, is all the 
 more doubtful, inasmuch as it is not the only sub- 
 stance which can render bacteria sensitive to the 
 flocculating action of salts. Bacteria that have 
 adsorbed iron, uranium, or aluminium compounds 
 are subsequently flocculable by salts, and silicic 
 acid is similar in its action. According to Bordet, 
 the essential phenomenon with agglutination, as 
 with other active substances in sera, is its union 
 with the antigen; as far as the agglutination itself, 
 which follows this union, is concerned, it is only a 
 secondary phenomenon on which we cannot depend 
 in considering agglutinins as functionally different 
 in molecular structure from the other antibodies. 
 The influence of salts upon agglutination is in 
 
4 2 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 a sense comparable to their action upon the pre- 
 cipitins. Joos found that antityphoid serum did 
 not agglutinate typhoid bacilli in the absence of 
 salts. For agglutination to take place he considers 
 it as necessary as the agglutinin and agglutinable 
 substance. He believes that salts play an active 
 part in the process. Bordet, on the other hand, 
 believes that the absence of salts offers only a 
 physical impediment to agglutination. Friedberger 
 does not consider that the salts act chemically, for he 
 found that agglutination took place in the presence 
 of grape sugar, asparigin, etc., in the place of salts. 
 In view of the fact that the protoplasm of the 
 body and the albuminous constituents of serum 
 have a close relationship to, or really are, colloids, 
 investigators have studied certain reactions which 
 occur among the colloids with the expectation 
 that these would throw some light on the reactions 
 of protoplasm and of serums. 1 Colloids diffuse 
 very slowly and exert little or no osmotic pressure, 
 supposedly because of the large size of the particles. 
 They do not conduct electricity, but the particles 
 react to the electric current by alterations in the 
 direction of their motion (i.e., toward the positive 
 or the negative pole) and, moreover, carry electric 
 charges themselves. The features of colloids which 
 bring them into relation with the subject in hand 
 are their coagulable nature in certain instances and 
 the fact that their particles may be agglutinated 
 
 1 This subject is well presented in : Pauli- Fischer, Physical 
 Chemisty in the Service of Medicine. Wiley & Sons, N. Y. 
 
AGGLUTININS 43 
 
 or precipitated by the addition of minute amounts 
 of salts (electrolytes). This of course is entirely 
 analogous to the need of salts in the agglutination 
 of bacteria by sera. In the latter reaction the 
 agglutinins carry a positive, the bacteria a negative 
 charge. The resulting combination, therefore, does 
 not precipitate from the menstruum supposedly 
 because there is still sufficient difference in the 
 electric potential. When salts are present the 
 kations so alter the electric conditions, of the colloi- 
 dal particles, i.e., of the agglutinin-bacterium com- 
 bination, that their surface tension is increased. 
 In order to overcome this the particles get together, 
 presenting in a clump less surface tension than if 
 they remained as individual particles. Some experi- 
 ments by Field indicate that the pro zone may be 
 explained on the assumption that the bacteria and 
 agglutinins behave as colloids. It has already 
 been stated that the union of agglutinin and bac- 
 terium does not precipitate because, possibly, there 
 is still sufficient electric potential; the combination 
 carries a negative charge. Field believes that with 
 very large amounts of agglutinin (as in the pro 
 zone) the bacteria load themselves with so much 
 agglutinin that the combination now carries a con- 
 siderable positive charge. The surface tension there- 
 fore is not sufficient to cause a clumping to occur. 
 Naturally, the presence of salts does not alter the con- 
 dition, as the kations also carry a positive charge. 
 Group Agglutinins. For some time after their 
 
44 
 
 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 discovery the agglutinins were regarded as strictly 
 specific, i.e., a serum derived, for example, from a 
 typhoid infection would agglutinate only typhoid 
 bacilli and no others. After a time, however, it was 
 found that such a serum would frequently aggluti- 
 nate somewhat related organisms, though not, 
 usually, to so high a degree. In other words, while 
 agglutinins may be nearly, if not quite, specific in 
 their action, a serum which produces agglutination 
 may be far from being so. 
 
 The following examples will illustrate the point. 
 In a case of infection with paratyphoid bacilli, 
 type B, the bacilli of the infecting type B were 
 agglutinated 1:5700; typhoid bacilli, however, only 
 1:120, while paratyphoid bacilli type A were not 
 agglutinated at all. In a case of typhoid infection 
 an agglutination with a dilution of i : 40 was obtained 
 for paratyphoid type B, while typhoid bacilli were 
 agglutinated in a dilution of i : 300 and over. As a 
 rule the agglutination with the infecting agent is by 
 far the strongest, i.e. it proceeds even in high dilu- 
 tions, whereas other bacteria require a stronger 
 concentration. 
 
 This phenomenon is known as group agglutina- 
 tion. The bacteria which are agglutinated by one 
 and the same serum need not necessarily be related, 
 although usually this is the case. Conversely, 
 microorganisms which, because of their morpho- 
 logical or other biological characteristics, are re- 
 garded as entirely identical or nearly so, are sharply 
 
AGGLUTININS 
 
 45 
 
 differentiated by means of their agglutination. 
 Because of this lack of absolute specificity the serum 
 diagnosis of infection or the identification of bac- 
 teria by means of agglutination tests, has value 
 only when very carefully tested. We have said 
 above that while agglutinins are specific, a serum 
 which produces agglutination may be far from 
 being so. The reason for this is that the serum 
 may contain several agglutinins. In fact, when 
 immunizing an animal with a particular bacterium 
 both specific and group agglutinins are produced. 
 This will perhaps be made clearer by reference to 
 the following diagram. We assume that the typhoid 
 
 A B C B ft E F 
 
 
 Typhoid Bacillus 
 
 Colon Bacillus 
 
 Dysentery Bacillus 
 FIG. 5. 
 
 bacillus possesses considerable protoplasm A, which 
 is specific for the typhoid bacillus; that it possesses 
 also certain protoplasm B, which is common to it, 
 and to the colon bacillus; and some protoplasm 
 C, common perhaps to some other bacterium. In 
 the case of the colon bacillus, protoplasm D is 
 specific, i.e., possessed only by this bacillus, while 
 B is common to it and the typhoid bacillus, and E 
 common to colon and dysentery bacilli. By immu- 
 nization with the typhoid bacillus we would obtain 
 
4 6 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 a serum containing agglutinins against protoplasm 
 A, B, and C. By virtue of this the serum \vould exert 
 some agglutinating power also on colon bacilli. 
 
 Absorption Method for Differentiating between 
 a Mixed and a Single Infection and for Identifying 
 Bacteria. In 1902 Castellani called attention to 
 a procedure which consists in saturating the diluted 
 immune serum with successive quantities of the 
 bacteria most strongly agglutinated until the agglu- 
 tinating power for these is zero. After centrifug- 
 ing, the clear fluid is tested on the second variety 
 of bacteria, and from this one learns whether mixed 
 or single infection was present. According to Castel- 
 lani, if the serum of an animal immunized against a 
 certain microorganism is saturated with that organ- 
 ism, the serum will lose its agglutinating power not 
 only for that organism, but also for all other varieties 
 that it formerly acted on. Saturated with the others, 
 its action upon the first is reduced little or none at all. 
 The serum of an animal immunized against two 
 microorganisms A and B. loses its agglutination 
 when saturated with A, only for A. Saturated with 
 A and B it loses agglutinating power for both. 
 
 The absorption test is extensively used in the 
 identification of bacteria, but it must be used with 
 caution, as its interpretation is open to error. Refer- 
 ring to the figure illustrating specific and group 
 agglutinins, let us assume we have obtained a 
 specific typhoid serum by immunization with typhoid 
 bacilli. By virtue of the common agglutinin, this 
 
AGGLUTININS 
 
 47 
 
 serum will act also on colon bacilli. On extracting 
 such a serum with typhoid bacilli, all the aggluti- 
 nating power would be lost, that for typhoid bacilli 
 as well as that for colon. On extracting the serum 
 with colon bacilli, we would remove the aggluti- 
 nating power for these bacilli, but leave the specific 
 agglutinating power for typhoid bacilli. If we 
 extracted the serum with a culture suspected to be 
 typhoid bacilli, and found after extraction that 
 the serum no longer agglutinated known typhoid 
 bacilli, we could conclude that the suspected culture 
 was also one of typhoid bacilli. 
 
 Formation of the Agglutinins According to the 
 Side-Chain Theory Receptors of First, Second and 
 Third Order. Ehrlich's theory as outlined in the 
 preceding chapter offers a ready explanation for the 
 development of these bodies. Certain peculiarities 
 of the agglutinins require merely a slight elabora- 
 tion of detail in order to be clearly understood. 
 According to Ehrlich the prime function of the side 
 chains of a cell is to provide for the nutrition of the 
 cell. Obviously the simplest mechanism for this 
 purpose will be a side chain which merely anchors 
 the food molecule, leaving the digestion entirely to 
 the cell proper. This type of receptor suffices for 
 comparatively small molecules such as those of the 
 toxins, for these are, after all, but the products of 
 cellular activity. When the protoplasm of the 
 bacterial cell itself, however, is to serve as food for 
 the animal cell the latter needs more than a mere 
 
4 g IMMUNE SERA 
 
 anchoring group, it needs also an active group 
 which can in some way act on the huge food par- 
 ticle and make it more readily assimilable. Such 
 receptors then possess two groups, a haptophore 
 group and another functional group acting on the 
 food particle thus anchored. Ehrlich calls these 
 his " receptors of the second order," and places in 
 this class the agglutinins and the precipitins. The 
 same action can perhaps be more economically 
 brought about by having these receptors, in addi- 
 tion to their specific haptophore group, possess the 
 means by which the action of a ferment-like sub- 
 stance can be brought to bear on the anchored 
 food particle. Such a receptor would then possess 
 two haptophore groups, one for the food particle, 
 the other for the ferment-like substance. These 
 are Ehrlich's " receptors of the third order " and 
 will be discussed in the next chapter. Confining 
 ourselves for the present to the agglutinins we find 
 that the existence of the two groups (haptophore 
 and agglutinating) has experimental confirma- 
 tion. We have seen that an agglutinin may be 
 changed by the action, for instance, of acids, so that 
 it will no longer possess any agglutinating action, 
 but will still combine with the bacteria. Once the 
 agglutinating power is lost it cannot be restored, 
 in which respect the agglutinins differ from the 
 bacteriolysins. 
 
FIG. 6. THE VARIOUS TYPES OF RECEPTORS ACCORDING TO 
 
 EHRLICH. 
 
 I. Receptors of the First Order. This type is pictured in a. The 
 
 portion e represents the haptophore group, whilst b represents a 
 toxin molecule, which possesses a haptophore group c and a 
 toxophore group d. This represents the union of toxin and 
 antitoxin, or ferment and antiferment, the union between anti- 
 body and the toxin or ferment being direct. 
 
 II. Receptors of the Second Order are pictured in c. Here e represents 
 
 the haptophore group, and d the zymophore group of the 
 receptor, f being the food molecule with which this receptor 
 combines. Such receptors are possessed by agglutinins and 
 precipitins. It is to be noted that the zymophore group is an 
 integral part of the receptor. 
 
 III. Receptors of the Third Order are pictured in III, e being the 
 
 haptophore group and g the complementophile group of the 
 receptor. The complement k possesses a haptophore group h 
 and zymotoxic group z; whilst f represents the food molecule 
 which has become linked to the receptor. Such receptors are 
 found in hsemolysins, bacteriolysins, and other cytolysins, the 
 union with these cellular elements being effected by the ambo- 
 ceptor (a thrust-off receptor of this order). It is to be noted 
 that the digesting body, the complement, is distinct from the 
 receptor, a point in which these receptors therefore differ from 
 those of the preceding order. 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND ILEMOLYSINS 
 
 Historical. As far back as 1874, Gscheidlen 
 and Traube l demonstrated that considerable quan- 
 tities of septic material could be injected into the 
 circulation of warm-blooded animals without 
 apparently any effect on the animal. Very little 
 was thought of this observation at the time, and it 
 is not until more than ten years later that we find 
 a similar observation made by Fodor. 2 In 1888 
 Nuttall 3 showed that normal blood serum possessed 
 marked germicidal properties, and his observations 
 stimulated a number of workers who undertook to 
 determine the conditions most favorable to the 
 exhibition of this phenomenon, and further to 
 decide upon the constituent of the serum to which 
 this property was due or whether it was a function 
 of the serum as a whole. In 1889 Buchner 4 pub- 
 lished a series of experiments and showed that an 
 exposure of 55 C. robs the serum of its bacteri- 
 cidal property. He concluded that the active 
 element in the process was a living albumen and 
 
 1 Gscheidlen and Traube. Schlez. Gesellschaft. f. Vater- 
 land. Cultur, Med. Sect., 1874. 
 
 2 Fodor, Deutsche med. Wochenschr, 1886. 
 
 3 Nuttall, Zeitschr. f. Hygiene, Vol. iv, 1888. 
 
 4 Buchner, Centralblatt Bacteriologie, Vol. v, 1889. Archiv. 
 f. Hygiene, Vol. x, 1890. 
 
 5 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND HALMOLYSINS 51 
 
 suggested for it the name " alexin." He found that 
 it was possible to greatly increase the bactericidal 
 action, (i.e. the quantity of " alexin ") for a par- 
 ticular bacterium by immunizing an animal with 
 that bacterium. 
 
 Pfeiff er's Phenomenon. An enormous advance 
 in the study of immunity was made in the dis- 
 covery of Pfeiffer's phenomenon in 1894, and it is 
 to Pfeiffer's splendid observations 1 that we owe 
 the first and most important insight into the mode 
 of action . of the bacteriolytic immune sera. A 
 normal guinea pig is able to kill and dissolve a 
 number of living cholera spirilla if these are in- 
 jected intraperitoneally. If in such an animal we 
 gradually increase the dose injected, it will be pos- 
 sible after a time to inject at one dose an amount 
 of cholera spirilla that represents many times an 
 ordinary fatal dose. If from this animal we now 
 withdraw serum and inject it into another animal, 
 we find that this serum, even in such small amounts 
 as the fractional part of a centigram or even of a 
 milligram, is able to protect the second animal 
 against living cholera spirilla. Under the influence 
 of these small amounts of serum of the treated ani- 
 mal, the organism of the untreated animal is able 
 to dissolve large amounts of cholera spirilla, amounts 
 which would otherwise be invariably fatal. This 
 process, as R. Pfeiff er showed, is a specific one, i.e., 
 
 1 R. Pfeiffer, Zeitschr. Hygiene, Vol. xviii, 1894. 
 
5 2 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 the serum of the guinea pig treated with cholera 
 spirilla transmits an increased solvent power only 
 for cholera spirilla, but not for any other species of 
 bacteria. The active substance of such a bacterio- 
 lytic immune serum Pfeiffer called a specific bac- 
 tericide. If we allow some of this specific cholera 
 immune -serum to remain for some time outside of 
 the body, e.g. in a bottle, and then test it for 
 solvent properties against cholera spirilla, not in a 
 living body but in a test-tube, we shall find that its 
 power is almost nil. If we add to this serum in 
 the test-tube some fresh peritoneal exudate or 
 some other body fluid, suoh as serum of a normal, 
 untreated guinea pig, as Metchnikoff first did, we 
 find that this serum has now acquired the power 
 to rapidly dissolve cholera spirilla even in a test- 
 tube. Bordet, 1 in 1895, showed that in order for 
 the specific immune serum to dissolve spirilla in a 
 test-tube, it is unnecessary to add fresh normal 
 serum or peritoneal fluid; but that immune serum 
 freshly drawn from the vein is able even under 
 these circumstances to dissolve the spirilla. 
 
 Haemolysis. In his experiments with the bac- 
 teriolysis of cholora spirilla, Bordet used as an 
 immune serum the serum of a goat that had been 
 immunized against cholera spirilla, and as alexin, 
 fresh normal guinea-pig serum. It often happened 
 that the latter contained a certain number of red 
 
 1 Bordet, Annal. Inst. Pasteur, 1895. 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND HsEMOLYSINS 53 
 
 blood cells and he found that these were agglutinated 
 and would be agglutinated even when mixed with 
 normal goat serum. Knowing, as he did, that 
 immunization against bacteria increases the agglu- 
 tinating property toward a given organism over 
 that in the normal animal, it was natural that he 
 should experiment to see whether similar results 
 could be obtained with red blood cells. Accord- 
 ingly he injected guinea pigs several times with 
 5 cc. defibrinated rabbit's blood, and found that 
 not only did this guinea-pig serum acquire agglu- 
 tinating properties, but also the property to dissolve 
 rapidly and intensely, in a test- tube, the red blood 
 cells of a rabbit. The serum of a normal guinea 
 pig was incapable of doing this, or did it in only a 
 slight degree. Bordet could further show that this 
 action is a specific one, i.e., the serum of animals 
 treated with rabbit blood acquires this dissolving 
 property only for the red cells of rabbits, not for 
 those of any other species of animal. ' For the 
 latter, such a serum is no more strongly solvent 
 than the serum of a normal animal. The same 
 property that Bordet had demonstrated in the serum 
 of guinea pigs treated with rabbit blood could now 
 be shown for the sera of all animals treated with 
 blood cells of a different species. We can formulate 
 this as follows: The serum of animals, species A, 
 after these have been injected either subcutaneously, 
 intraperitoneally, or intravenously with erythrocytes 
 
54 
 
 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 of species B, acquires an increased solvent action 
 for erythrocytes of species B, and only for this 
 species. 1 It is therefore a specific action. We call 
 this hcemolysis, and the substances which effect 
 the solution of the red cells, hcemolysins or hczmo- 
 toxins. 
 
 At about the same time, and independently of 
 Bordet, similar experiments with similar results 
 were published by Landsteiner 2 and v. Dungern. 3 
 As a result of this work, the acquired toxicity of 
 horse serum, found by Belfanti and Carbone when 
 they treated horses with red cells of rabbits, was 
 explained. The serum of the horses so treated had 
 become h&molytic for rabbit blood, and therefore 
 caused a solution or destruction of the red cells 
 in the living body just as it did in a test-tube. 
 
 Nature of Hcemolytic Sera. In a subsequent 
 study Bordet 4 was able to show that the sol- 
 vent power of the specific haemolysins depended 
 on the combined action of two constituents of the 
 specific serum. When the fresh haemolytic serum 
 was heated for half an hour to 55 C., it lost its 
 power. If to this inactive serum a very small 
 amount of the serum of a normal guinea pig was 
 added (a serum which of course was not haemolytic 
 for rabbit red cells), the full haemolytic power was 
 
 1 We shall point out a few exceptions later on. 
 
 2 Landsteiner, Centralblatt Bacteriol., Vol. xxv, 1899. 
 
 3 Von Dungern, Munch, med. Wochenschrift, 1898. 
 
 4 Bordet, Annal. Inst. Pasteur, Vol. xii, 1898. 
 
BACTERIOLYSIS S AND H&MOLYSINS 55 
 
 restored to this inactive serum. In other words, 
 it had been reactivated by this addition. 
 
 This experiment permits of only one conclusion, 
 namely, that the hDemolytic action of the specific 
 haemolytic serum depends on two substances. One 
 of these is able to withstand heating to 55C., and 
 is contained only in the specific serum. The other 
 is destroyed by heating to 55 C., and is contained 
 not only in the specific haemolytic serum, but also 
 in the serum of normal untreated animals. 
 
 Buchner, we have seen, applied the term alexins 
 to the constituents of normal serum which were 
 actively destructive to corpuscular elements, bac- 
 teria, and other cells with which they came in con- 
 tact. This term was retained by Bordet to desig- 
 nate that constituent of normal serum which did 
 not withstand heating to 55 C., and which was one 
 of the factors in the haemolytic process. The other 
 substance, which was found only in the specific 
 serum and which withstood heating to 55C., he 
 termed substance sensibilatrice. 
 
 According to Bordet, therefore, the substances 
 required for haemolysis are the substance sensibila- 
 trice of the specific haemolytic serurn and the 
 alexin which exists even in normal serum. The 
 action of these two substances Bordet explains by 
 assuming that the red cell is not vulnerable to the 
 alexin ; just as, for example, there are certain sub- 
 stances that will not take a dye without the previous 
 
56 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 action of a mordant. The substance sensibilatrice 
 plays the role of mordant. It makes the blood 
 cells vulnerable to the alexin, so that the latter can 
 attack the cells and dissolve them. The alexin he 
 regards as a sort of ferment body with digestive 
 powers. 
 
 Bordet says further, that the substance sensi- 
 bilatrice sensitizes the blood cells not only for the 
 alexin derived from the serum of the same species 
 as that from which it (the substance sensibilatrice) 
 is derived, but sensitizes such cells also for the 
 alexins of normal sera of other species. For ex- 
 ample, in the foregoing experiment of Bordet, the 
 substance sensibilatrice derived from the guinea 
 pig by treatment with rabbit blood sensitizes the 
 red blood cells of rabbits not only for the alexin 
 of normal guinea pig blood, but also for the alsxins 
 of other normal sera. In another experiment 
 this author showed that rabbit red cells sensitized 
 with an inactive specific haemolytic serum derived 
 from a guinea pig would dissolve rapidly on the 
 addition of normal rabbit blood. Here, then, the 
 rabbit red cells, sensitized (according to Bordet) by 
 the substance sensibilatrice of the guinea pig, dissolve 
 on the addition of the alexin of their own serum. 
 
 Resume. Reviewing the important facts we have 
 learned, we find them to be as follows: By means 
 of the treatment of one species of animal with the 
 erythrocytes of a different one, the serum of the 
 
B ACT ERIOLY SINS AND H&MOLYSINS $7 
 
 first species acquires an uncommonly increased 
 power to dissolve and to agglutinate the erythro- 
 cytes of the second species. This increased hsemo- 
 lytic power shows itself not only in vivo, so that an 
 animal so treated is able to cause red cells injected 
 into it to rapidly dissolve and disappear, but it 
 shows itself also in vitro when the serum of this 
 animal is used. The process consists in the com- 
 bined action of two substances, that which is excited 
 in response to the injection, the substance sensi- 
 bilatrice, and the alexin of normal serum. 
 
 Analogy between the Bacteriolytic and Haemolytic 
 Processes. If we now recall the main points in 
 cholera immunity the close analogy between this and 
 the subject of haemolysis is apparent. Just as, when 
 immunizing an organism against cholera bacilli 
 the organism responds with an increased solvent 
 power for those bacteria, so does, the organism 
 respond when it is treated, i.e. immunized, with 
 red cells of another species, by increasing the sol- 
 vent power of its serum for those particular cells. 
 Furthermore, just as the haemolytic process was 
 seen to depend on the combined action of two sub- 
 stances, one developed in the hagmolytic serum, 
 the other already present in normal serum, so also 
 in the bactericidal process just studied there are 
 two factors. It is easy to understand, therefore, 
 what formerly was not at all clear, why a specific 
 bactericidal serum against cholera, typhoid, or 
 
58 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 other infectious disease should not act in a test- 
 tube unless there had first been added some normal 
 serum (according to Metchnikoff), or there had 
 been employed a perfectly fresh serum (according 
 to Bordet) : simply because in either of these 
 ways the alexin necessary to co-operate with the 
 substance sensibilatrice is introduced. This alexin 
 no longer exists in the immune serum, if this be 
 not perfectly fresh, for we have seen that it decom- 
 poses either on warming, or spontaneously on stand- 
 ing. A bactericidal serum, therefore, that has 
 stood for some time is incapable of dissolving 
 bacteria. It is possible, however, to make an old 
 inactive serum again capable of dissolving bacteria 
 in vitro by adding a little fresh alexin, according 
 to the suggestion of Metchnikoff. In other words, 
 it is thus reactivated. Another obscure point was 
 cleared up by these studies: why a specific bac- 
 tericidal serum which is inactive in vitro should 
 be intensely active in the living body. This is 
 because in the living body the serum finds the alexin 
 necessary for its working, which is not the case in 
 the test-tube unless fresh normal serum be added. 
 We see from all this that even the first experiments 
 in haemolysis have served to clear up a number of 
 practical points in an important branch of bacteri- 
 ology. 
 
 Ehrlich and Morgenroth on the Nature of Haemo- 
 lysis. In continuing the study of hsemolysins we 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND H.EMOLYS1NS 59 
 
 must note particularly the researches of Ehrlich 
 and Morgenroth. 1 These authors asked themselves 
 the following questions: (i) What relation does 
 the haemolytic serum or its two active components 
 bear to the cell to be dissolved? (2) On what 
 does the specificity of this haemolytic process 
 depend ? Ehrlich was led to these researches partic- 
 ularly by his so-called Side-chain Theory, which 
 we shall examine in a moment. 
 
 He made his experiments with a hasmolytic 
 serum that had been derived from a goat treated 
 with the red cells of a sheep. This serum, there- 
 fore, was haemolytic specifically for sheep blood 
 cells; i.e., it had increased solvent properties exclu- 
 sively for sheep blood cells. 
 
 Basing his reasoning on his side-chain theory, 
 Ehrlich argued as follows: " If the haemolysin is 
 able to exert a specific solvent action on sheep 
 blood cells, then either of its two factors, the sub- 
 stance sensibilatrice of Bordet or the alexin of nor- 
 mal serum, must possess a specific affinity for these 
 red cells. It must be possible to show this experi- 
 mentally." Such in fact is the case, and the experi- 
 ments devised by him are as follows : 
 
 Experiment i . Ehrlich and Morgenroth, as 
 already said, experimented with a serum that was 
 specifically haemolytic for sheep blood cells. They 
 
 1 See the various papers in "Collected Studies on Immunity," 
 Ehrlich- Bolduan, Wiley & Sons, New York, 1910. 
 
60 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 made this inactive by heating to 55 C., so that then 
 it contained only the substance sensibilatrice. 
 Next they added a sufficient quantity of sheep 
 red cells, and after a time centrifuged the mixture. 
 They were now able to show that the red cells had 
 combined with all the substance sensibilatrice, and 
 that the supernatant clear liquid was free from the 
 same. In order to prove that such was the case 
 they proceeded thus: To some of the clear centri- 
 fuged fluid they added more sheep red cells; and, 
 in order to reactivate the serum, a sufficient amount 
 of alexin in the form of normal serum was also 
 added. The red cells, however, did not dissolve 
 there was no substance sensibilatrice. The next 
 point to prove was that this substance had actually 
 combined with the red cells. The red cells which 
 had been separated by the centrifuge were mixed 
 with a little normal salt solution after freeing them 
 as much as possible from fluid. Then a little alexin 
 in the form of normal serum was added. After 
 remaining thus for two hours at 3 7 C. these cells 
 had all dissolved. 
 
 In this experiment, therefore, the red cells had 
 combined with all the substance sensibilatrice, 
 entirely freeing the serum of the same. That the 
 action was a chemical one and not a mere absorp- 
 tion was shown by the fact that red blood cells of 
 other animals, rabbits or goats for example, exerted 
 no combining power at all when used instead of 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND H&MOLYSINS 6l 
 
 the sheep cells in the above experiment. The 
 union of these cells, morever, is such a firm one 
 that repeated washing of the cells with normal salt 
 solution does not break it up. 
 
 So far as concerns the technique of the experi- 
 ments, I should like to observe that the addition 
 of red cells in this as well as in all the following 
 experiments was always in the form of a 5% mix- 
 ture or suspension in 0.85%, i.e., isotonic, salt solu- 
 tion. 
 
 The second important question solved by these 
 authors was this; What relation does the alexin 
 bear to the red cells ? They studied this by means 
 of a series of experiments similar to the preceding. 
 
 Experiment 2. Sheep blood was mixed with 
 normal, i.e. not haemolytic, goat serum. After a 
 time the mixture was centrifuged and the two por- 
 tions tested with substance sensibilatrice to deter- 
 mine the presence of alexin. It was found that in 
 this case the red cells acted quite differently. In 
 direct contrast to their behavior toward the sub- 
 stance sensibilatrice in the first experiment, they 
 now did not combine with even the smallest por- 
 tion of alexin, and remained absolutely unchanged. 
 
 Experiment 3. --The third series of experiments 
 was undertaken to show what relations existed 
 between the blood cells on the one hand, and the 
 substance sensibilatrice and the alexin on the 
 other, when both were present at the same time, 
 
62 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 and not, as in the other experiments, when they 
 were present separately. This investigation was 
 complicated by the fact that the specific immune 
 serum very rapidly dissolves the red cells for which 
 it is specific, and that any prolonged contact be- 
 tween the cells and the serum, in order to effect 
 binding of the substance sensibilatrice, is out of 
 the question. Ehrlich and Morgenroth found that 
 at o C. no solution of the red cells by the haemo- 
 lytic serum takes place. They therefore mixed some 
 of their specific hsemolytic serum with sheep blood 
 cells, and kept this mixture at o-3 C. for sev- 
 eral hours. No solution took place. They now 
 centrifuged and tested both the sedimented red 
 cells and the clear supernatant serum. It was 
 found that at the temperature o-3 C. the red 
 cells had combined with all of the substance sen- 
 sibilatrice, but had left the alexin practically 
 untouched. 
 
 It still remained to show the relation of these 
 two substances to the red cells at higher temper- 
 atures. At 37-4o C., as already mentioned, 
 haemolysis occurs rapidly, beginning usually within 
 fifteen minutes. It was possible, therefore, to 
 leave the cells and serum in contact for not over 
 ten minutes. Then the mixture was centrifuged 
 -as before. The sedimented blood cells mixed with 
 normal salt solution showed haemolysis of a moder- 
 ate degree. The solution became complete when 
 
'BACTERtOLYSINS AND HMMOLYSMS 63 
 
 a little normal serum was added. The supernatant 
 clear fluid separated by the centrifuge did not dis- 
 solve sheep red cells. On the addition, however, 
 of substance sensibilatrice it dissolved them com- 
 pletely. 
 
 From this experiment Ehrlich concludes that the 
 substance sensibilatrice possesses one combining 
 group with an intense affinity (active even at o C.), 
 for the red cell, and a second group possessing a 
 weaker affinity (one requiring a higher temperature) 
 for the alexin. 
 
 Nomenclature. In place of the name substance 
 sensibilatrice Ehrlich first introduced the term 
 immune body; later on he called it the amboceptor, 
 to express the idea that it served as a link between 
 alexin and cell. Other names proposed for this sub- 
 stance have been substance fixatrice by Metchnikoff, 
 copula, desmon, preparator by Muller. Instead of 
 the name alexin, Ehrlich now uses the term com- 
 plement in order to express the idea that this body 
 completes the action of the immune body. 
 
 According to Ehrlich the red blood cells possess 
 specific affinity for the immune body, but none 
 whatever for the alexin. The alexin, therefore, 
 possesses no combining group which can attach itself 
 directly to the red blood cell. It acts on these cells 
 only through an intermediary, the immune body, 
 which therefore must possess two binding groups one 
 of which attaches to the red blood cell and the other to 
 
64 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 the alexin of normal serum. As already stated, the 
 group which attaches to the red blood cell possesses 
 a much stronger affinity than that which combines 
 with the alexin. This follows from the last two 
 experiments of Ehrlich before cited, in which he 
 showed that at the lower temperature, and with 
 both substances present with the blood cells, only 
 the immune body combined with the cells, while 
 the alexin remained uncombined. At the higher 
 temperature the alexin also exerted its affinity, foi 
 then the red cells combined with all the immune 
 body and with part of the alexin. We saw that 
 after a time the red cells partially dissolved, but 
 that complete solution occurred only after some 
 fresh alexin had been added. This showed that 
 although the red cells had combined with all the 
 immune body necessary for their solution, they had 
 been unable to bind all the alexin necessary. We 
 may say, therefore, that that group of the immune 
 body w r hich combines with the red cell has a 
 stronger affinity than that which combines with the 
 alexin. 
 
 Role of the Immune Body. According to Ehrlich, 
 then, the role of the immune body consists in this, 
 that it attaches itself to the red cell on the one hand, 
 and to the complement on the other, and in this way 
 brings the digestive powers of the latter to bear 
 upon the cell, the complement possessing no affinity 
 for the red cell. Immune body and complement 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND H^EMOLYSINS 65 
 
 have no very great affinity for each other. At o C. 
 they may exist in serum side by side, and they 
 combine only at higher temperatures. 
 
 The amount of immune body which combines 
 with the red cells may vary greatly, as the experi- 
 ments of Bordet and of Ehrlich clearly show. 
 Some red cells combine with only just enough 
 immune body to effect their solution. Others are 
 able to so saturate themselves with immune body 
 that they may have a hundred times the amount 
 necessary for their solution. 
 
 On what the Specificity Depends. From the pre- 
 ceding it follows that the specific action of the 
 haemolytic sera, and, I may at once add, of the bac- 
 tericidal sera also, is due exclusively to the immune 
 body. This possesses a combining group which is 
 specific for the cells with which the animal was 
 treated; e.g., the combining group of an immune 
 body produced by treatment with rabbit blood 
 will fit only to a certain group in the blood cells of* 
 rabbits; an immune body produced by treatment 
 with chicken blood will fit only to parts of the red 
 cells of chickens; one produced by treating an ani- 
 mal with cholera bacilli will fit only to this species 
 of bacteria and combine only with the members of 
 it. Keeping to the well-known simile of Emil 
 Fischer, the relation is like that between lock and 
 key, each lock being fitted only by a particular 
 key. 
 
66 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 To repeat for the point is of the greatest 
 importance the role of the immune body consists 
 in tying the complements of normal serum, which 
 have no affinity for the red cells or for the bacteria, 
 indirectly to these cells so that their solution and 
 digestion may be effected by the complements. 
 In other words, the immune body serves to con- 
 centrate on the corpuscular element to be dis- 
 solved all the widely distributed complement found 
 in normal serum. 
 
 Ehrlich's conception of the relation existing be- 
 tween complement, immune body (i.e., amboceptor) 
 and erythrocyte is shown in the accompanying 
 figure. 
 
 i. H. 
 
 symotoxic group 
 
 \ 
 
 COMPLEMENT ^ 
 
 haptophore group 
 complementophile gr. 
 IMMUNE BODY ~ 
 
 :ytophile group 
 receptor 
 
 CEL1 
 
 FIG. 7 
 
 Difference between a Specific Serum and a Normal 
 One. The difference, then, between a specific 
 haemolytic or a specific bactericidal serum and a 
 normal one consists in this * that the specific serum 
 contains an immune body which is specific for a 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND H&MOLYS1NS 67 
 
 certain cellular clement and by means of which the 
 complement present in all normal serum can be con- 
 centrated on this element to cause its solution. We 
 shall return to this subject later. 
 
 Diverging Views of Ehrlich and Bordet. Now if 
 we recall the first experiments of Bordet and his 
 conclusions respecting the manner in which the 
 factors concerned a^.ted, we shall at once see how 
 Ehrlich and Bordet differ. Bordet assumes that 
 the substance sensibilatrice (the immune body) 
 acts as a kind of mordant on the red cells or bac- 
 teria, sensitizing these to the action of the alexin 
 (complement). That is to say, neither the cell nor 
 the immune body has alone any manifest affinity 
 for the alexin, but they form by their union a 
 complex which can absorb alexin, in other words 
 which has particular properties of adhesion. Accord- 
 ing to Bordet, then, there is no such thing as an 
 amboceptor, and no complementophile group. He 
 cites the experiments of Muir as showing that the 
 hypothesis of a complementophile group is untenable. 
 This author found that blood corpuscles which had 
 fixed the sensitizer (immune body) and had been 
 saturated with alexin could subsequently, by dif- 
 fusion, lose a certain amount of their sensitizer, 
 although they retain the complement, and what is 
 more, in this instance they lose as much sensitizer 
 as if they had not absorbed complement. Con- 
 sequently, says. Bordet, it is in no way through the 
 
68 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 mediation of the sensitizer that the alexin attaches 
 itself to the corpuscles; if this were the case the 
 removal of the sensitizer would necessarily imply 
 that of the alexin (complement) , which, as we have 
 just mentioned, does not leave the corpuscles. 
 
 According to Ehrlich, however, the process is not 
 analogous to a staining process, but follows definite 
 laws of chemical combination, there being, in fact, 
 no affinity whatever between the complement and 
 the blood cells or bacteria. Furthermore, according 
 to this authority, the complement always acts 
 through the mediation of the immune body, which 
 possesses two combining groups; one, the cytophile 
 group, combining with the cell, and another, the 
 complementophile group, combining with the com- 
 plement. 
 
 The Side-Chain Theory Applied to these Bodies. - 
 All of the specific relations which, in a previous 
 chapter, we saw existed between toxin and anti- 
 toxin, Ehrlich and Morgenroth in their experi- 
 ments above noted found existed also between 
 immune body and the specific blood cell. The 
 immune body must therefore possess a haptophore 
 group which fits exactly to certain receptors or 
 side chains of the red cells, just as the anti-body 
 according to the side-chain theory possesses a 
 group that fits exactly into the specific combining 
 group i.e., haptophore group of the toxin or 
 toxoid used for exciting the immunity. 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND H&MOLYS1NS 69 
 
 If, for example, we produce a haemolytic serum 
 specific for red cells of a rabbit by injecting an 
 animal with these cells, the haptophore groups of 
 this serum, i.e., the free side chains thrust off, must 
 possess specific combining relations with the red 
 cells of rabbits. That such is the case in the haemo- 
 lytic immune serum we saw from the experiments 
 of Ehrlich and Morgenroth. 
 
 In consequence of all this, Ehrlich widened 
 the application of his side-chain theory so as to 
 include not only the production of antitoxin but 
 also the production of bactericidal, haemolytic, 
 and other immune bodies. He expressed this 
 somewhat as follows: // any substance, be it toxin, 
 ferment, constituent of a bacterial or animal cell, or 
 of animal fluid, possess the power by means of a 
 fitting haptophore group to combine with side chains 
 (receptors) of the living organism, the possibility for 
 the overproduction and throwing off of these recep- 
 tors is given, i.e., the possibility to produce a cor- 
 responding anti-body. 
 
 Specific anti-bodies in the serum as a result of 
 immunizing processes can only be produced, there- 
 fore, by substances which possess a haptophore 
 group l and which, in consequence, are able to form a 
 firm union with a definite part of the living or- 
 ganisms, the receptor. This is not the case with 
 
 1 Such substances Ehrlich terms ''haptins." See page 
 16. 
 
70 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 alkaloids, e.g., morphine, strychnine, etc., which 
 according to Ehrlich enter into a loose union, a kind 
 of solid solution with the cells. It is for this reason 
 that we are unable to produce any anti-bodies in 
 the blood serum against these poisons. Ehrlich 
 says further that all of the substances taking part 
 in the production of immunity, including of course 
 complement and immune body, have certain 
 definite affinities for each other, and in order 
 to act they must fit stereochemically to each 
 other. 
 
 As we have already seen, we are able by means 
 of the injection of a variety of substances or cells 
 to produce a similar variety of immune bodies in 
 the serum. Thus we can immunize a rabbit so 
 that its serum will possess specific haemolytic 
 bodies against the red cells of guinea pigs, goats, 
 chickens, and oxen and specific bactericidal 
 bodies against cholera and typhoid bacilli, etc., 
 and as we shall see, still other groups of anti- 
 bodies. 
 
 Multiplicity of Complements. Under these cir- 
 cumstances an important question presents itself: 
 Is there in normal serum one single complement 
 which completes the action of all these various 
 immune bodies, one, for example, which in the 
 above illustration will fit all the haemolytic immune 
 bodies as well as all the bactericidal ones, or 
 are there a great many different complements? 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND HMMOLYSINS 71 
 
 Ehrlich, as a result of his experimental work 
 with Morgenroth, claims that the latter is the case ; 
 namely, that it takes a different complement to fit 
 the immune body specifically haemolytic for guinea 
 pig blood than it does to fit that specific for chicken 
 blood. 
 
 Bordet, on the other hand, assuming that the 
 immune body plays the role of mordant, believes 
 that there is but one single complement in the 
 serum. According to him, this complement is 
 able to dissolve blood cells as well as bacteria after 
 these have been sensitized by their specific immune 
 body. Each of these authors supports his claims 
 by means of ingenious experiments, for the details 
 of which, however, we must refer to the original 
 articles, as they require the knowledge of a specialist 
 for their comprehension. We shall, however, give 
 one of Bordet 's l experiments on this point in some 
 detail, since it has found extensive application in 
 another direction. 
 
 The Bordet-Gengou Phenomenon. Bordet sensi- 
 tized blood corpuscles with appropriate amboceptors, 
 and then exposed them to the action of a freshly drawn 
 normal serum. If now he waited for the occurrence 
 of haemolysis and then added sensitized cells (bacteria 
 or blood corpuscles of a different species), the latter re- 
 mained entirely unchanged, although the serum that had 
 been used as complement was capable in its original con- 
 
 1 Bordet and Gengou, Annal. Inst. Pasteur. Vol. xv, 1901. 
 
72 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 dition of destroying these also. When fresh serum was 
 first brought into contact with sensitized bacteria, simi- 
 lar results were obtained. The blood corpuscles sub- 
 sequently added did not then undergo haemolysis. 
 // such an action on one of the sensitive substrata has 
 once taken place, the active sera, as a rule, are deprived 
 of all their complement functions, from which Bordet 
 concludes that the destruction of the most varied 
 elements by one and the same serum must be due to a 
 single complement. 
 
 It may be said in passing that Ehrlich admits the 
 correctness of the above experimental results, but 
 brings forward arguments to show that Bordet 's inter- 
 pretation as to the existence of only a single complement 
 cannot be accepted. 
 
 This experiment of Bordet is usually spoken of as 
 the " Bordet-Gengou phenomenon " and is now used 
 largely in determining whether or not a given serum 
 possesses certain amboceptors. The serum to be 
 tested is first heated and then mixed with a small 
 quantity of fresh normal serum (complement) and 
 with an emulsion of the bacterium whose amboceptors 
 it is desired to discover. After standing for six hours 
 at room temperature, red blood cells previously treated 
 with heated haemolytic serum are added. If there is 
 no hsemolysis it is held to mean that the complement 
 in the fresh serum which was suitable for lysis of 
 properly prepared blood corpuscles, has been absorbed 
 by the bacteria by reason of the presence of specific 
 amboceptors in the serum tested. 
 
 Wassermann 1 has attempted to apply this method 
 in measuring the amboceptor content of specific menin- 
 
 * Wassermann, Neisser and Brack, Deutsche med. Wochen- 
 schr., 1906; Wassermann and Plaut, Ibid. 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND H&MOLYS1XS 73 
 
 gococcus sera and has successfully adapted the Bordet- 
 Gengou test to the diagnosis of syphilitic infections. 1 
 
 Neisser and Sachs 2 have recently described a procedure 
 for the forensic diagnosis of blood stains. The principle of 
 this is the same as in the preceding, although in so far as 
 a specific precipitin serum is made use of, the procedure is 
 really modelled after the "Gengou-Gay" phenomenon. 
 
 If human blood serum is mixed with a specific 
 human precipitin serum derived from rabbits, it will 
 be found that the mixture binds complement. Hae- 
 molysin subsequently added is unable to dissolve its 
 specific red blood cells, owing to this locking up of 
 the complement. Only the serum of monkeys has a 
 similar effect. The amount required is extremely 
 minute, T W^o to TTy <yV<y<T cc - human blood or monkey 
 blood sufficing. Extracts of human blood stains will also 
 produce the desired effect. The authors believe that 
 the immunization with human blood serum gives rise 
 not only to precipitins but also to amboceptors which 
 then are able to unite with their corresponding unformed 
 albuminous bodies and so bind complement. Others 
 are of the opinion that the complement is bound by 
 the precipitin-precipitum combination. 
 
 The test is extremely delicate and has been found 
 trustworthy by a number of investigators. In view 
 of the importance of such tests in medico-legal cases, 
 Neisser and Sachs suggest that it should always be 
 used in addition to the well known Wassermann- 
 Uhlenhuth precipitin test. 
 
 Normal Serum, its Haemolytic and Bacteriolytic 
 Action. Inquiring now into the essential differ- 
 
 1 See also page 185. 
 . 2 Neisser and Sachs, Berliner klin. Wochenschrift, 1905. 
 
74 
 
 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 ence between a specific haemolytic or bactericidal 
 serum and a normal one, we must first of all study 
 the behavior of normal serum toward alien red 
 cells and bacteria. It has long been known to 
 physiologists that fresh normal serum of many 
 animals has the power to dissolve blood cells of 
 another species. This was studied especially by 
 Landois. One-half to one c.c. of normal goat serum, 
 for example, is able to dissolve 5 c.c. of a 5% mix- 
 ture (in normal salt solution) of rabbit or guinea 
 pig red cells. In the same way, these red cells 
 are dissolved by the sera of oxen, of dogs, etc. 
 This normal globulicidal property of the serum cor- 
 responds to another which fresh normal serum was 
 found to possess, namely, the property to dissolve 
 appreciable quantities of many species of bacteria. 
 This analogy was pointed out by Fodor, Nutall, 
 Nissen, and especially by Buchner. We call this 
 the bactericidal property of fresh normal serum. 
 
 This property is well illustrated by the following 
 protocol from Park. 
 
 No. of bacteria 
 in i cc. fluid. 
 
 Amount of 
 serum added. 
 
 Approximate number alive after being kept at 37 O 
 
 One hour. 
 
 Two hours. 
 
 Twenty-seven hrs. 
 
 30,000 
 100,000 
 
 1,000,000 
 
 . I CC. 
 . I CC. 
 0. I CC. 
 
 400 
 5,000 
 400,000 
 
 2 
 1,000 
 2,OOO,OOO 
 
 
 200,000 
 10,000,000 
 
 It is at once apparent that the number of bacteria 
 introduced is an important factor, the normal serum 
 being able to kill off only a certain number. 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND H^MOLYSINS 7- 
 
 Buchner, as we have already seen, had studied 
 this bactericidal action carefully and ascribed the 
 action to a substance found in all normal serum, 
 which he called alexin. According to his experi- 
 ments, this is a very unstable substance, decom- 
 posing spontaneously on standing or on heating for 
 a few minutes to 55 C., or readily on the action 
 of chemicals. According to this author all the 
 globulicidal and bactericidal functions of normal 
 serum are performed by this one substance, the 
 alexin. 
 
 Active and Inactive Normal Serum. In taking 
 up the study of the haemolytic action of normal 
 serum Ehrlich and Morgenroth sought par- 
 ticularly to discover whether in normal serum 
 the haemolytic property depended on the action of 
 a single substance, the complement (Buchner's 
 alexin), or whether here as in the specific haemo- 
 lytic serum it depended on the combined action 
 of two substances. For this purpose they used 
 guinea-pig blood, which is dissolved by normal 
 dog serum. If this serum was heated to 55 C., it 
 lost its haemolytic power. It was necessary now 
 to show that in this inactive dog serum there 
 remained a second substance which could be reacti- 
 vated after the manner of reactivating an old 
 specific haemolytic serum. This had its difficulties, 
 for they could not add normal dog serum. This, 
 as we saw, is already haemolytic for guinea-pig 
 
7 6 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 blood. " Possibly/' said they, " there exists a com- 
 plement of another animal which will fit the hypo- 
 thetical second substance of this dog serum." 
 This proved to be the case, the complement of 
 guinea-pig blood fulfilling the requirements. If 
 they added to the inactive normal dog serum about 
 2 c.c. normal guinea-pig serum the haemolytic prop- 
 erty was restored and the guinea-pig red cells 
 dissolved completely. According to Ehrlich, this can 
 only be explained by assuming that in guinea-pig 
 blood there exists a complement which happens to fit 
 the haptophore group of the second substance or 
 inter- body, of the normal dog serum. This com- 
 bination of guinea-pig blood, inactive normal dog 
 serum, and a reactivating normal guinea-pig serum 
 is well adapted to demonstrate the existence in 
 normal dog serum of an inter-body; for the guinea- 
 pig serum should be the best possible preservative 
 for the guinea-pig red cells. The haemolysis fol- 
 lowing the addition of this serum shows positively 
 the existence of a substance in the dog serum which 
 has acted with something in the guinea-pig serum. 1 
 
 1 Of such combinations, i.e., combinations in which a com- 
 plement derived from the same animal from which the red cells 
 are derived fits to the inter-body of other species of animals, 
 causing the solution of red cells of the latter, Ehrlich and 
 Morgenroth found still other examples. For instance, guinea- 
 pig blood, inactive calf serum, guinea-pig serum; goat blood, 
 inactive rabbit blood, goat serum; sheep blood, inactive rabbit 
 blood, sheep serum; guinea-pig blood, inactive sheep serum, 
 guinea-pig serum. 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND H&MOLYSINS 77 
 
 Inter-body and Complement. We see, then, that 
 the haemolytic action of normal sera depends, just 
 as that of the specific haemolytic sera, on the com- 
 bined action of two bodies: one, the inter-body, 
 which corresponds to the immune body of the 
 specific sera, and a second or complement. In 
 speaking of the constituents of normal serum, 
 Ehrlich and Morgenroth prefer to use this term 
 inter-body to distinguish it from the immune bodies 
 of specific hasmolytic sera. 
 
 Action not Entirely Specific. It has also been 
 found that there frequently exist normal sera which 
 are haemolytic not only for one species of red cell, 
 but for several. We saw, for instance, that normal 
 goat serum dissolved the red cells of guinea pigs 
 and rabbits. The question now arises, Is this prop- 
 erty of normal goat serum due to two inter-bodies 
 existing in the serum side by side, one fitting the 
 red cells of the guinea pig, the other those of the 
 rabbit? Ehrlich and Morgenroth answered this 
 in the affirmative, for in the following experi- 
 ment they succeeded in having each of the two 
 inter-bodies combine with its respective cell. To 
 some inactive normal goat serum they added rab- 
 bit blood and centrifuged the mixture. To the 
 separated clear fluid they again added some rab- 
 bit red cells as well as normal horse serum to reac- 
 tivate the mixture. Horse serum is not haemo- 
 lytic for rabbit red cells. The mixture remained 
 
7 8 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 unchanged, no haemolysis taking place. If, how- 
 ever, they added some of this normal horse serum 
 to the centrifuged red cells, the latter immediately 
 dissolved. Now, to the clear centrifuged fluid, 
 which as we have seen would not dissolve rabbit 
 red cells, they added guinea-pig red cells and again 
 some normal horse serum to reactivate the mixture. 
 The guinea-pig red cells all dissolved. This proved 
 conclusively that in the normal goat serum there 
 had existed two specific inter-bodies. One, for 
 rabbit red cells, had been tied by these cells and 
 carried down with them in centrifuging ; the other, 
 specific for guinea-pig red cells, had remained 
 behind. 
 
 Multiplicity of the Active Substances. Further 
 investigation led these authors to assume a still 
 greater multiplicity in the substances in normal 
 serum which are concerned in haemolysis. In 
 addition to the two interbodies just mentioned, they 
 demonstrated the existence in goat serum of two 
 specific complements, one for each interbody, and 
 they were able by means of Pukall filters to separate 
 these two. In this filtration the complement fit- 
 ting the inter-body for rabbit blood remained 
 behind for the greater part, while that fitting 
 the inter-body for guinea-pig blood mostly passed 
 through. 
 
 Whereas then, according to Buchner, only one 
 substance, the alexin, is concerned in the haemo- 
 
B ACT ERIOLY SINS AND H JEM OLY SINS 79 
 
 lytic action of this normal goat serum, these 
 experiments of Ehrlich and Morgenroth show 
 us four substances, viz., two inter-bodies and 
 two complements. This at once makes clear the 
 opposing views of these authorities. According to 
 Ehrlich, however, the number of active substances 
 in normal serum is still greater, for it often hap- 
 pens that a specific inter-body shows itself to be 
 made up of several inter-bodies, all, to be sure, 
 fitting the same specific red cell, but differing 
 from each other by their behavior toward dif- 
 ferent complements. Ehrlich, therefore, regards 
 the substances concerned in haemolysis which 
 occur in normal serum to be of great number and 
 variety. 
 
 Difference between a Normal and a Specific 
 Immune Serum. Practical Application. Return- 
 ing now to the question of the difference between a 
 specific immune serum and a normal one, we find 
 this to be as follows : Normal serum contains a great 
 variety of inter-bodies, in very small amounts, and a 
 considerable amount of complements. In immune 
 serum, on the other hand, the amount of a specific 
 inter-body, the one which fits the haptophore group 
 of a certain cell, is enormously increased. This 
 specifically increased inter-body, it will be remem- 
 bered, is called the immune body. The comple- 
 ment, as shown by v. Dungern, Bordet, Ehrlich 
 and Morgenroth and Wassermann, is in no way 
 
80 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 increased by the immunizing process. The increase 
 affects solely the immune body. It is therefore 
 possible to have a serum which contains more 
 immune body than complement to satisfy it, and if 
 we withdraw such a serum from an animal we shall 
 find that it contains some free immune body. This 
 serum can only then exert its 'full power when the 
 full amount of complement is present, i.e., when 
 some normal serum is added. If we treat a rabbit 
 with the red cells of an ox, as v. Dungern did, we 
 shall obtain a serum which is haemolytic for ox 
 blood. Of this freshly drawn serum 0.05 c.c. suf- 
 fice to dissolve 5.0 c.c. of a 5% mixture of ox 
 blood. If now we add to this haemolytic serum 
 a little normal rabbit serum, we shall find that 
 only one-tenth of the amount of serum is required; 
 i.e., only 0.005 c - c - to dissolve the same quantity 
 of ox blood. This means that through the addi- 
 tion of the rabbit serum, which, of course, is not 
 haemolytic for ox blood, a sufficient amount of 
 complement was added to enable all the immune 
 body of the specific serum to act. This specifically 
 increased power of the immune serum to act on 
 certain definite cells depends on the fact that the 
 immune body resulting from the immunizing 
 process concentrates the action of the comple- 
 ment scattered through the serum, on cells for 
 which it has definite affinities. If 2 c.c. of normal 
 guinea-pig serum are able to dissolve, we will say 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND H&MOLYSlNS 8l 
 
 5 c.c. of a 5% defibrinated rabbit-blood mixture, 
 and if we find that after the immunizing process 
 0.05 c.c. of the guinea-pig serum suffice to dissolve 
 the same amount of rabbit blood, we conclude 
 that through this process the inter-body, i.e. the 
 immune body, has been increased forty times. We 
 know that the complement has not been increased, 
 but this is now able to act by means of forty times 
 increased combining facilities. This increase, how- 
 ever, is exclusively for rabbit-blood cells. In a 
 bactericidal immune serum this specific increase is 
 sometimes as much as 100,000 times that of normal 
 serum. 
 
 The practical idea to be gained from this for 
 the therapy of infectious diseases is this: that 
 with the injection of an immune serum we supply 
 only one of the necessary constituents to kill 
 and dissolve the bacteria, and that is the immune 
 body. 
 
 We do not, however, supply the second, i.e. the 
 complement, for this we have seen is not increased 
 by the immunizing process. As matters stand, 
 then, the use of a specific immune serum for 
 therapeutic purposes assumes that the complement 
 which is essential for the action of the immune 
 body will be found in the organism to be treated. 
 Since in certain infectious diseases the required 
 complement is present in too small amounts in 
 the organism, Wassermann suggested that the 
 
82 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 curative power of many bactericidal sera might be 
 increased by the simultaneous injection of the sera 
 of certain normal animals in order thus to gain 
 an increased amount of complement; but we 
 shall soon see that this procedure, while of great 
 value in animal experiments, presents certain dif- 
 ficulties. 
 
 Nature of the Immune Body Partial Immune 
 Bodies of Ehrlich Turning now to a closer study of 
 the nature of the immune body, we again find a dif- 
 ference of opinion. Whereas Bordet, MetchnikofI, 
 and Besredka assume each immune body to be a 
 single definite substance, Ehrlich and Morgenroth 
 as a result of their experiments hold to a plurality 
 of bodies. 
 
 These authors say that each immune body 
 is built up of a number of partial-immune bodies, 
 a point to which we have already alluded. In 
 support of this view they offer the following ex- 
 periment. On immunizing a rabbit with ox blood, 
 they obtained a serum haemolytic not only for 
 ox blood but also for goat blood; on immunizing 
 a rabbit with goat blood they obtained a serum 
 haemolytic for goat blood and ox blood. 1 
 
 The conditions present can be readily under- 
 stood by reference to Fig. 7, which represents 
 schematically three portions of the combining groups 
 
 1 We have already called attention to these exceptions to the 
 rule of specific action. 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND HAZMOLYSINS 83 
 
 of the blood cells. Of these a is present only in the 
 ox-blood cells, ^ only in the goat-blood cells, and ft 
 in both. If a rabbit is injected with ox blood, the 
 immune bodies corresponding to groups a and ft 
 will be formed. On subjecting such a serum to 
 absorption with ox-blood cells we shall find that 
 these, by means of their a and ft groups will be able to 
 absorb all the immune bodies, whereas goat-blood 
 cells will in a similar test absorb only the immune 
 
 FIG. 7 
 
 body of portion ft, leaving the immune body of 
 portion a in solution. 
 
 According to Ehrlich's theory, then, the red cells 
 of the ox possess certain receptors which are identi- 
 cal with receptors possessed by the goat red cells. 
 From this it follows that in a single red cell there 
 are several or many groups each of which is able, 
 when it finds a fitting receptor, to take hold of a 
 
84 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 single immune body. Ehrlich and Morgenroth, 
 therefore, claim that the immune body of a haemo- 
 lytic serum is composed of the sum of the partial 
 immune bodies which correspond to the individual 
 receptors used to excite the immunity. It may be 
 assumed, then, that not all of the combining groups 
 of a cell, be this a blood cell or a bacterium, will 
 find fitting receptors in every animal organism, 
 and that therefore not all the possible partial im- 
 mune bodies will be equally developed. In one 
 animal there may be receptors which are not pres- 
 ent in another, and in this way there might be a dif- 
 ferent variety of partial immune bodies in the two 
 animals. This would lead to the possibility of the 
 occurrence of immune bodies, for the same species 
 of blood cell or bacterium, differing from each other 
 in the partial immune bodies composing them, 
 according to the variety of animals used in prepar- 
 ing the serum. 
 
 Metchnikoff's Views Practical Importance of 
 the Point. This view is directly opposed to that of 
 MetchnikofT and Besredka, who believe that a cer- 
 tain immune body, e.g. one specific for ox blood, 
 is always the same no matter from what animal it 
 is derived. The point is not merely theoretical, 
 but under certain circumstances of great practical 
 importance. If we believe, as Ehrlich does, that 
 the immune body differs according to the species of 
 animal from which it is derived, i.e., that it is made 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND H&MOLYSINS 85 
 
 up of different partial-immune bodies, then we must 
 admit that we have better chances for finding fit- 
 ting complements if we make use of immune bodies 
 derived from a variety of animals. We would, for 
 instance, be likely to achieve better results in treat- 
 ing a typhoid patient with a mixture of specific 
 bactericidal typhoid sera derived from a variety of 
 animals than if we used a serum derived only from 
 a horse. For in such a mixture of immune bodies 
 the variety of partial-immune bodies must be very 
 great and the chances that the complements of the 
 human body will find fitting immune bodies, and so 
 lead to the destruction of the typhoid bacilli, are 
 greatly increased. Ehrlich and his pupils have 
 actually proposed such a procedure in the use of 
 bactericidal sera for therapeutic purposes. 1 
 
 Support for Ehrlich' s View. Besides the above 
 experiments we possess others which support the 
 theory that the immune body is not a simple but 
 a compound substance, v. Dungern had already 
 shown that following the treatment of an animal 
 with ciliated epithelium from the trachea of an ox, 
 there were developed immune bodies which acted 
 not only on the ciliated epithelium but also on the 
 red cells of oxen. We must assume, therefore, that 
 
 1 Reasoning along similar lines, namely, that the human 
 complement must fit the immune body of the therapeutic 
 serum, Ehrlich has also proposed that these bactericidal sera 
 be derived from animals very closely related to man, e.g., 
 apes, etc. 
 
86 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 the ciliated epithelium and the red cells of the ox 
 possess common receptors. Analogous to this is 
 the action of the immune body resulting from the 
 injection of spermatozoa, as was pointed out by 
 Metchnikoff and Moxter. 
 
 We see, then, that the specific action of immune 
 bodies is not so limited as to apply only to the cells 
 used in the immunizing process, but extends to 
 other cells which have receptors in common with 
 these." 
 
 So far as concerns the site in the organism where 
 the substances used in immunizing find their 
 receptors, this is not known for the hsemolytic 
 immune body. For the bactericidal immune bodies 
 of cholera and typhoid the researches of Pfeiffer, 
 Marx, and others show that the chief site of pro- 
 duction is in the bone-marrow, spleen, and lymph 
 bodies. Wassermann's experiments on local immu- 
 nity indicate that the site of infection determines 
 largely the site of the development of the immune 
 bodies. 
 
 Antihaemolysins : their Nature Anti-complement 
 or Anti-immune Body? A further step in the 
 study of haemolysins is one discovered independ- 
 
 1 The same holds good for the agglutinins and the pre- 
 cipitins still to be studied. In these the action extends also 
 to closely related cells and bacteria, or in the case of the precipi- 
 tins to closely related albumins, as these possess a number of 
 receptors which are common to them and to the cells or sub- 
 stances used for immunizing. 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND H^EMOLYSINS 87 
 
 ently by Ehrlich and Morgenroth on the one hand, 
 and Bordet on the other. These authors succeeded 
 in producing an antih&molysin. The procedure is 
 closely related to the results gained by immuniza- 
 tion against bacterial poisons. A specific haemoly- 
 sin, one, for example, specific for rabbit blood, 
 derived by treating a guinea pig with rabbit red 
 cells, is highly toxic to rabbits. Injected into the 
 animals intravenously in doses of 5 c.c. it kills the 
 animals acutely, causing intra vitam a solution of 
 the red cells. Such a haemolytic serum, then, acts 
 the same as a bacterial poison, and it is possible to 
 immunize against this just as well as against a bac- 
 terial poison. For example, to keep to our illustra- 
 tion, rabbits are injected first with very small doses 
 of this specific haemolytic serum. The dose is 
 gradually increased until it is found that the animal 
 tolerates amounts that would be absolutely fatal to 
 animals not so treated. If some of the serum of 
 this animal is now abstracted and added to the 
 specific haemolytic serum, it is found that the power 
 of the latter will be inhibited. According to 
 Ehrlich an antihanwlysin has been formed. As 
 we know that the action of the haemolysin depends 
 on the combined action of two substances, the 
 immune body and the complement, the question 
 arises to which of these two the antihasmolysin is 
 related. Is it an anti-immune body or an anti- 
 complement? A study of this question shows that 
 
88 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 both these substances are apparently present. In 
 the serum of the rabbit treated with specific haemo- 
 lysin, both an anti-immune body and an anti- 
 complement have been found. Ehrlich and Mor- 
 genroth were further able to show that the action 
 of the anti-complement depended on a haptophore 
 group which it possessed, enabling it to combine 
 with the haptophore group of the complement, 
 thus satisfying this and hindering its combination 
 with the complementophile group of the immune 
 body. 
 
 " Anti- complement." l *Since the complements are 
 constituents of normal serum, it should be possible 
 to produce anti-complements by injecting animals 
 merely with normal serum; and they can, in fact, 
 be so produced. If rabbits are treated by inject- 
 ing them several times with normal guinea pig 
 serum, a serum may be obtained from these rabbits 
 which contains anti-complements against the com- 
 plements of normal guinea-pig serum. A serum 
 obtained in this way of course contains only one of 
 the antihaemolytic bodies, the anticomplement, 
 and not the antiimmune body. This is because 
 normal serum is too poor in immune body (inter- 
 body) to excite the production of any antiimmune 
 body. 
 
 1 The existence of anti-complements is denied by Bordet, 
 Gay and others. For a statement of their views see pa<je 
 96. 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND IL-EMOLYSINS 89 
 
 If to a hsemolytic serum derived from guinea pigs 
 we add an anticomplement serum derived, as just 
 stated, from rabbits, and containing an anticom- 
 
 * I 
 
 ii. 
 
 f 
 
 COMPLEMENT 
 
 COMPLEMENT 
 
 ANTICOMPLEMENT 
 
 IMMUNE BODY J| f IMMUNEBODY 
 
 CELL MB m m CELL 
 
 FIG. 8. (After Levaditi.) 
 
 plement specific for guinea-pig complement, the 
 haemolytic action of the former will be inhibited, for 
 the reason that the complement necessary for the 
 haemolysis to take place has been bound by the 
 anticomplement. (See Fig. 8.) One must, how- 
 ever, observe the precaution to heat the anticom- 
 plement serum of the rabbit to 55C. before so 
 mixing it, in order to destroy the complement which 
 it contains and which would otherwise reactivate the 
 guinea-pig immune body. 
 
 From the foregoing we see that either anti- 
 immune body alone, or anticomplement alone, is 
 able to inhibit the hxmolytic action. Haemoly- 
 sis cannot take place when either of the two 
 
9 
 
 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 necessary factors is bound and prevented from 
 acting. l 
 
 The action of anticomplements is specific, i.e., an 
 anticomplement combines only with its specific 
 complement. Thus an anticomplement serum 
 derived from rabbits by treatment with guinea- 
 pig serum combines only with the complement of 
 normal guinea-pig serum, not, however, with the 
 complements of other animals. Exceptions to this 
 are those cases in which the complement of the 
 other species possess receptors identical with those 
 of the first. 
 
 In order that a normal serum of species A, 
 injected into species B, produce anticomplements 
 there, the side-chain theory demands that the com- 
 plements of A find fitting receptors in species B. 
 According to Ehrlich, however, normal serum con- 
 tains many different complements and not merely a 
 single one. Under the circumstances, it is easily 
 possible that only a few of the complements in the 
 serum of A find fitting receptors in species B. We 
 shall then obtain an anticomplement serum which 
 inhibits the action of some, but not of all the com- 
 plements of species A. Thus it might inhibit the 
 
 1 By treating animals with normal sera of certain other 
 species, it is possible to produce not only anti-complements, 
 but also specific anti-bodies against certain other constituents 
 of normal serum. These are, for example, anti-agglutinins, 
 which inhibit the action of the haemagglutinins of normal serum, 
 and anti-precipitins, which we shall discuss later. 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND HsEMOLYSINS 91 
 
 action of a complement fitting to a certain bacteri- 
 cidal immune body and not of one contained in the 
 same serum which fitted a certain haemolytic im- 
 mune body, etc. 
 
 Fluctuations in the Amount of Complement and 
 other Active Substances in the Blood We have 
 come to know certain conditions under which there 
 may be a decrease of certain complements in 
 normal serum. Ehrlich and Morgenroth showed 
 that in rabbits poisoned with phosphorus and in 
 whom, therefore, the liver was badly damaged^ 
 the serum on the second day (the height of the 
 disease) had lost its power to dissolve guinea-pig 
 blood, and that this was due to a disappearance of 
 the complement. Metchnikoff also reported that in 
 an animal suffering from a continuing suppurating 
 process, the complement had fallen considerably in 
 amount. Especially interesting are the experi- 
 ments of v. Dungern, who showed that animal cells, 
 hence emulsions of fresh organs, are able to attract 
 and combine with complements. 
 
 Even more important than the question of a 
 decrease in complements, or an inhibition of their 
 action, is that of the possibility to artificially in- 
 crease them. A number of authors, among them 
 Nolf and Miiller, have answered this question in the 
 affirmative. They believe they have noticed such 
 an increase following the injection of an animal with 
 
92 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 all sorts of substances, such as normal serum of 
 another animal, sterile bouillon, etc. v. Dungern, 
 Wassermann and others, have not been able to con- 
 vince themselves of the possibility of such a definite 
 increase. Wassermann tried to excite the increased 
 production of complement by injecting guinea pigs 
 for some time with anticomplement. This being 
 the opposite of the complement, he hoped to be 
 able by immunizing to excite an increase of the 
 complements. In this he was unsuccessful, though 
 of course it maybe possible with another species of 
 animal. 
 
 Despite all this, we must believe that the amount 
 of complement, as well as the amount of other active 
 substances of the blood, inter-bodies, agglutinins, 
 antitoxins, ferments, antiferments, etc., is subject 
 to great fluctuations even in the same individual, 
 a constant change going on within the organism. 
 Ehrlich, in particular, has pointed out these indi- 
 vidual and periodic variations and has insisted on 
 their importance. Very likely, under circumstances 
 of which we now know very little, these substances 
 are at certain times produced in greater amounts, 
 at other times in lesser; sometimes they may be 
 absent entirely in an individual in whom they were 
 previously present. For example, the serum of a 
 dog will at times dissolve the red cells of cats, rab- 
 bits, and guinea pigs, at other times not. Further- 
 more, the serum of one and the same animal may 
 
B ACT ERIOLY SINS AND H.EMOLYSINS p* 
 
 possess specific haemolytic properties for certain 
 cells, and later on may lose this property entirely. 
 In human serum these same individual and periodic 
 variations may be demonstrated, as Wassermann 
 was able to prove experimentally. However, the 
 circumstances on which these variations depend are 
 as yet entirely unknown to us. Possibly we are 
 dealing here with subtle pathological changes. 
 
 Source of the Complements Leucocytes as a 
 Source Other Sources. Where do the comple- 
 ments or alexins originate? This question has been 
 studied particularly by Metchnikoff and by Buch- 
 ner; also by Bail, Hahn, Schattenfroh, and others. 
 These investigators believe that the leucocytes are 
 the source of the complements or alexins. There 
 is, however, this difference between the views 
 of Metchnikoff and Buchner: whereas Buchner 
 believes the alexins to be true secretory products, 
 Metchnikoff believes that they originate on the 
 breaking up of the leucocytes, i.e., that they are de- 
 composition products. Metchnikoff bases his belief 
 chiefly on the work of his pupil, Gengou, who showed 
 that although the serum was rich in alexin (i.e., com- 
 plement) the plasma contained none at all. 
 
 Other authors, as Pfeiffer and Moxter, as a result 
 of their experiments, are not willing to assume the 
 existence of any relationship between the alexins 
 and the leucocytes. Gruber as well as Schatten- 
 froh are ready to believe the leucocytes to be the 
 
94 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 source of an alexin, but claim that this is different 
 from that found in serum. Wassermann believes 
 that the leucocytes are a source of complements 
 (alexins), for he succeeded in producing anticom- 
 plement by means of injections of pure leucocytes 
 which had been washed free from all traces of serum, 
 and which had been obtained by injections of aleu- 
 ronat. In view of the plurality of the comple- 
 ments, Wassermann expressed the view that the 
 leucocytes are probably one source, but not the 
 only one, for the complements of the serum. Land- 
 steiner and Donath have confirmed this experi- 
 mentally. They succeeded in producing anticom- 
 plement by the injection, not only of leucocytes, 
 but of other animal cells. Furthermore, the experi- 
 ments of Ehrlich and Morgenroth already mentioned, 
 in which the complements disappeared after the 
 destruction of the liver function, show that the liver 
 cells are concerned in the formation of complements. 
 Structure of Complements Haptophore and Zy- 
 motoxic Groups Complementoids. Ehrlich 's con- 
 ception of the structure of complements is based 
 principally on the fact that when complement is 
 heated to 55 C., its complementing power is lost. 
 If animals are injected with such a heated serum, 
 anticomplement will be produced, showing, accord- 
 ing to Ehrlich, that heating has not destroyed the 
 entire complement body, but only that part which 
 effects the digesting, solvent action. The hapto- 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND HMMOLYSINS 
 
 95 
 
 phore group must have remained intact. Ehrlich 
 therefore concludes that the complements consist 
 of a combining haptophore group which withstands 
 heating to 55 C., and another, more fragile group, 
 which possesses the actual solvent properties and 
 which Ehrlich calls the zymotoxic group. The 
 complements, according to this conception, are 
 entirely analogous to the toxins already studied. 
 
 zymotoxic group 
 COMPLEMENT 
 haptophore group 
 
 IMMUNE BODY 
 
 FIG. 9. 
 
 And just as those toxins which had lost their 
 toxophore group were called toxoids, so Ehrlich 
 terms complements which have lost their zymo- 
 toxic group, complementoids . 
 
 Bordet, it will be recalled, does not believe in 
 any complementophile group in the amboceptor. 
 So also in the case of the complement, or alexin 
 as he prefers to call it, he refuses to accept Ehrlich 's 
 view that this contains a zymotoxic and a hapto- 
 
96 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 phore group. The fact that heated complement 
 produces an anticomplementary serum is readily 
 explained by Bordet as due to the absorption of 
 complement by precipitates. An illustration will 
 bring out this point more clearly. 
 
 Goat serum heated to 55 C., and therefore con- 
 taining no active complement, is injected into a 
 rabbit. According to Ehrlich it excites the pro- 
 duction of an " anticomplement " in response to 
 the " complementoid " which it contains. As we 
 shall see in the next chapter, the injection of this 
 heated goat serum in addition to whatever else it may 
 do does actually excite the production of a specific 
 precipitin in the serum of the rabbit, so that when 
 such a rabbit serum is mixed with goat serum, a pre- 
 cipitate will be "produced. Ehrlich 's demonstration 
 of the " anticomplement " is somewhat as follows: 
 Ox blood corpuscles, plus suitable amboceptor (serum 
 of a rabbit injected with ox blood corpuscles), plus 
 fresh, normal goat serum as complement, undergo 
 haemolysis. When, however, the fresh, normal 
 goat serum is mixed with the serum of a rabbit 
 previously injected with goat serum, and then the 
 above combination carried out, no haemolysis 
 occurs. The rabbit serum contains an " anti- 
 complement," says Ehrlich. On the other hand, 
 Bordet and Gay believe that the anticomplement- 
 ary action is due to the absorption of goat com- 
 plement by the precipitate produced by the mix- 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND H.&MOLYSINS 
 
 97 
 
 ture of goat serum and its precipitin, the rabbit 
 serum. Moreschi comes to the same conclusion. 
 
 Isolysins Autolysins Anti-isolysins. All of 
 the preceding studies in haemolysis have concerned 
 themselves with the results obtained by injecting 
 animals of one species with blood cells of another. 
 Ehrlich and Morgenroth now sought to discover 
 what the results would be if they injected an animal 
 with blood cells of its own species. They injected 
 goats with goat blood, and found that when the 
 amount injected at one time was large the serum 
 of the goat injected acquired hasmolytic properties 
 for the blood of many other goats, but not for all. 
 The substances thus formed the authors called 
 isolysins. These, then, are substances which will 
 dissolve the blood of other individuals of the same 
 species. Substances which dissolve the blood cells 
 of the same individual are called autolysins. But 
 autolysins have so far been demonstrated experi- 
 mentally only once (by Ehrlich and Morgenroth). 
 If one tests the properties of an isolysin of a goat on 
 the blood of a great many other goats, it will be 
 found that this will be strongly solvent for the 
 blood of some, slightly for the blood of others, and 
 not at all for still others. 
 
 By using a blood that was readily dissolved by 
 the isolysin, and proceeding in the same series of 
 experiments which we have already studied under 
 haemolysis, Ehrlich and Morgenroth showed that 
 
98 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 the isolysins, like the hsemolysins, consist of an 
 immune body and a complement of the normal 
 serum. The experiments undertaken by these 
 authors were made on thirteen goats, and the sur- 
 prising fact developed that the thirteen resulting 
 isolysins were all different. For example, the iso- 
 haemolytic serum of one goat dissolved the red cells 
 of goats A and B\ that of a second goat those of 
 C and D ; of- a third those of A and D, but not of C, 
 and so on. If now they produced antiisolysins by 
 injecting animals with these isolysins, they found 
 that these antiisolysins were specific; i.e., the anti- 
 isolysin of A would inhibit the action only of iso- 
 lysin of A, but not of C, etc. These results are of 
 the highest clinical interest, for they show a differ- 
 ence in similar cells of the same species, something 
 that had never before been suspected. In the above, 
 the blood cells of species A must have a different bi- 
 ological constitution than those of species C, etc. 
 
 Moss finds that isolysins occur in about 2 5 % of adult 
 human individuals, and that the relative frequency is 
 the same in health and disease, so that the presence 
 of isolysins has no diagnostic significance. The sub- 
 ject has recently acquired importance because of the 
 revival of homologous transfusion, and it is customary 
 now to always test the blood of both donor and re- 
 cipient prior to carrying out such a transfusion. The 
 technique of the test is described in the appendix. 
 
 The fact that after injections of large amounts of 
 
BACTER10LYSINS AND HMMOLYSINS 
 
 99 
 
 cells of the same species isolysins develop, but that 
 autolysins are almost never formed, caused Ehr- 
 lich and Morgenroth to assume that the body pos- 
 sesses distinct regulating functions which naturally 
 prevent the formation of the highly destructive 
 autolytic substance. It is obvious that if there 
 were no such regulating facilities, the absorption of 
 large bloody effusions and hemorrhages might lead 
 to the formation by the organism of autolysins 
 against its own blood cells. Gengou, a pupil of 
 Metchnikoff, believes to have shown experimen- 
 tally that the destructive action of these auto- 
 lysins is hindered by the simultaneous production 
 of an auto-antiimmune body which immediately 
 inhibits their action. 
 
 In order that isolysins may be formed, it seems 
 necessary to overwhelm the organism once or sev- 
 eral times with large amounts of cells or cell prod- 
 ucts of the same species ; to produce, as Ehrlich says, 
 an ictus immunisatorius. Wassermann tried, by 
 using various blood poisons, such as haemolytic sera, 
 toluylenediamine, etc., for a continued length of 
 time, to cause the formation of these isolysins, but 
 without success, although in these experiments 
 each injection was followed by an appreciable 
 destruction of red cells and absorption of their 
 decomposition products. The gradual and even 
 repeated absorption of not too large quantities of 
 decomposed red cells does not therefore lead to the 
 
100 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 formation of isolysins; but, as already said, a sudden 
 overwhelming of the organism by large amounts 
 of the cells or their products is necessary. 
 
 Deflection of Complement. In the use of the 
 antitoxic sera, experience has shown that the em- 
 ployment of a large dose is of paramount importance. 
 So far as the antitoxic action is concerned l one 
 cannot do harm by giving a large excess. Con- 
 cerning the action of bactericidal sera, however, 
 the literature contains a number of examples which 
 indicate that here an excess of immune serum is 
 occasionally injurious. Perhaps the earliest proto- 
 col of this kind is that published by Loffler and 
 Abel 2 on their experiments with bacillus coli and a 
 corresponding immune serum. Out of nineteen 
 guinea pigs which had been inoculated with the 
 same amount of culture and had received varying 
 amounts of immune serum, only six animals were 
 protected, those which had received doses of 0.25 
 c.c. to 0.02 c.c. Eight animals with larger doses, 
 as well as five with smaller doses of serum died. 
 Neisser and Wechsberg 3 encountered the same 
 phenomenon in bactericidal test-tube experiments, 
 and concluded as a result of their experiments 
 
 1 We shall discuss the rash production, or " serum sickness," 
 page 141. 
 
 3 F. Loffler and R. Abel, Centralblatt Bacteriol., 1896, Vol. 
 xix, p 51. 
 
 8 M. Neisser and F. Wechsberg, Munch, med. Wochen- 
 schrift. 1901. No. 1 8. 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND H&MOLYS1NS IOI 
 
102 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 that the only satisfactory explanation was one based 
 on the views of Ehrlich and Morgenroth. In Fig. 
 10, A II represents schematically a bacterium a 
 with a number of receptors; for there are many 
 reasons for assuming that each bacterium possesses a 
 number of receptors of the same kind. According 
 to the side-chain theory, if we inject this bacterium 
 into an animal an over-production of the corres- 
 ponding group will occur, resulting in a serum 
 which is rich in body b. This body b, however, is 
 not able by itself to injure the bacteria, and a 
 bacterium all of whose receptors are laden with b 
 need not at all be injured in its vitality. Body b 
 normally possesses a peculiar function, namely, 
 to serve as a coupling member or link, and hence it 
 possesses two groups (amboceptor). As has already 
 been discussed, one of these groups fit the receptors 
 of the bacterium on the one hand and the com- 
 plement on the other. When, therefore, to a normal 
 serum which contains suitable complement, we add 
 equivalent amounts of immune serum, the con- 
 dition pictured in A I will result. On adding the 
 corresponding bacterium to this we get the con- 
 dition shown in A II, in which all the bacterial 
 receptors are occupied with immune bodies, or 
 more accurately, with immune bodies which on 
 their part are loaded with bacteriolytic comple- 
 ment c. in the case here presented let us say that 
 it requires the occupation of all of the receptors 
 
BACTER10LYSINS AND HJEMOLYSINS IO3 
 
 with complemented interbodies to cause the death 
 of the bacterium. 
 
 If now to an equivalent mixture of comple- 
 ment and inter-body we add an excess of inter-body, 
 it will be possible for only a part of the inter-body to 
 be loaded with complement, leaving a portion of 
 the inter-body uncomplemented. On adding the 
 corresponding bacteria a number of conditions may 
 result; the affinity of the inter-body for the bac- 
 terial receptor may, as a result of the loading with 
 complement, (i) remain unchanged, (2) it may 
 thereby be increased, or (3) be diminished. 
 
 In the figure, B II shows the condition of in- 
 creased affinity. Of the six inter-bodies only those 
 combine with the bacterium which have become 
 laden with complement. In this case, therefore, 
 the excess of inter-bodies will have no influence on 
 the bactericidal effect. The condition is really the 
 same as A II, except that free inter-body is also 
 present. 
 
 C II shows the condition of unchanged affinity. 
 In this case, if we add the bacterium to the mixture 
 of complement and excess of inter-body, all the 
 receptors of the bacterium will, to be sure, be occu- 
 pied by inter-bodies, but this will be entirely with- 
 out regard to the fact that these inter-bodies are or 
 are not loaded with complement. It may there- 
 fore happen that only a few of the bacterial receptors 
 will be occupied by complemented (i.e., active) 
 
104 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 inter-bodies, while the rest of the bacterial receptors 
 are occupied by uncomplemented (hence inactive) 
 inter-bodies. As already stated, however, the 
 vitality of such a bacterium is not necessarily 
 destroyed. 
 
 D II represents the last conceivable case. It i^ 
 assumed that the " completion " of the inter-body 
 has resulted in a diminution of the latter 's affinity 
 for the bacterial receptor. In this case primarily 
 only the uncomplemented inter-bodies will com- 
 bine with the bacterial receptors, while the free 
 fluid will contain complemented inter-bodies. 
 
 In cases C II and D II, therefore, the excess of 
 inter-body exerts a deflecting action on ike complement, 
 thus diminishing the end results. 
 
 It is difficult to say to what extent " deflection of 
 complement " really occurs in the experiments 
 referred to above. Studies by Buxton, Gay, and 
 others show that deflection of complement will not 
 always explain the phenomenon, and that in these 
 instances other factors must be responsible for the 
 paradoxical results. 
 
 Practical Value of Injections of Anti-Bacterial 
 Sera. We use the term " antibacterial" advisedly, 
 because, after all, when we immunize an animal 
 against a certain bacterium we do not produce 
 merely a bactericidal serum, but one which con- 
 tains agglutinins, precipitins, opsonins, and per- 
 haps still other antibodies as well. The use of 
 
BACTERIOLYSINS AND H.EMOLYSINS 
 
 specific antibacterial sera has been tried in man both 
 to cure existing infections and as a preventive of 
 infection. The therapeutic use has in most instances 
 been rather disappointing, though in dysentery, 
 plague, gonococcus and meningococcus infections 
 the results have been somewhat better. Recently 
 also, fairly good reports are heard from the admin- 
 istration of large doses of antistreptococcus serum. 
 In susceptible animals injections of some of the 
 very virulent bacteria, as pneumococci, strepto- 
 cocci, typhoid bacilli and cholera spirilla, can be 
 robbed of all danger if small doses of their respective 
 sera are given before the bacteria have increased to 
 any great extent in the body. If given later they 
 are ineffective. Conditions in man are probably 
 very similar. 
 
 The reasons for the failure of these antibacterial 
 sera when used therapeutically demand a moment's 
 consideration. It is apparent from all that has 
 gone before that a deeper insight into the mechan- 
 ism of immunity discloses many difficulties to be 
 overcome before we can hope for much in a practical 
 way. In the case of the bacteria sera, for example, 
 we have as yet found no method of increasing the 
 complements, and these are apparently highly im- 
 portant in destroying the invading bacteria. Nor 
 have we any way to determine the proper dose so 
 as to avoid the phenomenon termed "deflection of 
 complement." Possibly, also, as Ehrlich has sug- 
 
106 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 gested, the complements present in human serum 
 may not be able to reactivate immune bodies 
 derived from the horse, sheep, or other animal 
 furnishing the therapeutic serum. Probably the 
 most important cause of the failure of these sera 
 is that they do not reach the bacteria in the body. 
 In the case of cholera, for example, it is hardly to 
 be expected that the serum injected would affect 
 the spirilla, for most of these are in the intestinal 
 contents, and therefore really outside of the body. 
 In many of the bacterial infections the organisms 
 accumulate in the lymph glands and other sites 
 where they cannot readily be reached by anti- 
 bodies circulating in the blood. Instructive in this 
 connection are the good results achieved by intra- 
 spinal injections of antimeningococcus serum, when 
 exactly the same serum had proven valueless when 
 given subcutaneously. 
 
PRECIPITINS 
 
 Definition. All ol the foregoing experiments 
 have concerned themselves with the results obtained 
 by injection of cellular material of one animal into 
 another. In the further study of this subject, 
 experiments were made to discover what happens 
 when dissolved albuminous bodies of one species are 
 injected into animals of another species. This line 
 of investigation was first pursued by Tchistowitsch, 1 
 who injected rabbits with the serum of horses and 
 of eels. On withdrawing serum from such rabbits 
 and mixing it with horse or eel serum, the mix- 
 ture became cloudy, owing to the precipitation of 
 part of the albumin of the horse or eel serum by 
 that of the rabbit. Normal rabbit serum does not 
 possess this property. Bordet was able to demon- 
 strate that the same thing takes place if rabbits are 
 treated with chicken blood. On mixing such a 
 serum with chicken serum, a precipitate formed. 
 The substances which develop in the serum by 
 treating an anima 1 with albuminous bodies of 
 another animal, and which precipitate these a'bumins 
 when the sera of the two animals are mixed, are 
 
 1 Tchistowitsch, Annal. Pasteur. Vol. xiii, 1899. 
 107 
 
io8 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 called precipitins.' 1 This power of the organism to 
 react to the injection of foreign dissolved albuminous 
 substances has been found to be very extensive. 
 
 Bacterial Precipitins. In 1897, R. Kraus showed 
 that the serum of a rabbit immunized against 
 typhoid often produces a precipitate in the bac- 
 terial-free nitrate of a bouillon culture of typhoid 
 bacilli. This fact has been verified by subsequent 
 investigators and the reaction found to be specific. 
 In general, the best results are obtained with old 
 bouillon cultures which contain a larger proportion 
 of the autolytic products. It was natural that this 
 reaction should at once be applied to the diagnosis 
 of typhoid and other diseases. Numerous experi- 
 ments however have shown that Kraus' phenomenon 
 is not nearly so constantly observed as that of 
 agglutination, and the reaction is therefore but 
 little used. Whether the bacterial precipitins are 
 identical in character with those obtained by 
 injecting an animal with an unrelated serum (zoopre- 
 cipitins), is still undecided. Rostoski, as well as 
 Nuttall, believes that they are probably different. 
 So much for bacterial precipitins. 
 
 Lactoserum Other Specific Precipitins. Bordet, 
 by injecting cows' milk into rabbits', was able to 
 produce a serum which precipitates the casein of 
 
 1 It will be recalled that, besides the production of pre- 
 cipitins, the above procedure causes the formation of other 
 anti-bodies such as anti-complements, anti-agglutinins, etc. 
 
PREC1PITINS 
 
 log 
 
 cows' milk. He called this lactoserum. Ehrlich, 
 Morgenroth, Wassermann, Schtitze, Myers, and 
 Uhlenhuth showed that by treating a rabbit with 
 chicken albumin a precipit'n is formed which pre- 
 cipitates chicken albumin. Myers, by treating ani- 
 mals with Witte's pep ton and globulin, produced a 
 serum that contained specific antipeptons and anti- 
 globulins. Pick and Spiro, by using albumose, 
 produced antialbumoses. Leclainche and Vallee, 
 Stern, Mertens, and Ziilzer treated animals with 
 human albuminous urine and produced a serum 
 which contained a precipitin specific for this sub- 
 stance. Schutze, by treating rabbits with a vege- 
 table albumin, as well as with human myoalbumin, 
 produced a precipitin specific for these albumins. 
 This does not exhaust the recital of the work done 
 in this field, and there is a host of other albuminous 
 bodies which, when injected into an animal, are 
 able to excite the production of precipitins. 
 
 Specificity of the Precipitins. It was soon recog- 
 nized that the specificity is not absolute. Above all, 
 this depends upon the strength of the serum, i.e., 
 its degree of activity. This is measured by the 
 dilution in which it will still react. Thus a highly 
 active serum, one, for example, which will still 
 give a distinct reaction when diluted i : 1000 or over, 
 will produce a marked precipitate with the serum 
 used to excite its production ; whereas, in the serum 
 of other animal species it will produce slighter pre- 
 
HO IMMUNE SERA 
 
 cipitates, or only cloudings. A less highly active 
 serum will likewise cause a marked precipitate in 
 the homologous blood solution, and a slight pre- 
 cipitate, or only a clouding, at the most, in a closely 
 related species. For example, the serum of a rabbit 
 which has been treated with sheep blood produces 
 a marked precipitate in a solution of sheep blood ; a 
 slight precipitate in a goat -blood solution ; and a still 
 fainter one in an ox-blood solution. In some in- 
 stances th2 two latter will show only a clouding. If 
 we employ a very weak serum, even the cloudings 
 will be absent, and a precipitate is formed only in 
 the sheep-blood solution. If human blood or 
 blood serum has been injected, the clouding and 
 precipitation will occur most readily (aside, of 
 course, from human-blood solution) in that of apes. 
 In the precipitin reaction, therefore, the relationship 
 of the single animal species is an important factor. 
 This peculiar behavior has first been thoroughly 
 studied by Nuttall * who made observations on 
 five hundred different animals. As a result of these 
 we know that a weak human-blood antiserum, 
 besides reacting on human blood, causes a clouding 
 only in the blood of anthropoid apes (chimpanzee, 
 gorilla, orang-outang) ; a stronger serum causes a 
 clouding also in the blood of other monkeys ; finally 
 
 1 British Medical Journal, 1901, Vol. ii, and 1902, Vol. i. 
 See also Nuttall, Blood Immunity and Blood Relationship, 
 1904. The Macmillan Co., N. Y. 
 
PRECIPITINS III 
 
 a very highly active serum reacts with the blood of 
 all the mammalia. In that case, of course, only a 
 faint clouding is produced even after considerable 
 time. Nuttall also obtained antisera, each of which 
 was specific for one of the large animal classes 
 (birds, reptiles, amphibia). Here, too, the same 
 quantitative differences were noted. 
 
 Nature of the Precipitins. The precipitins are 
 fairly resistant bodies, whose power gradually 
 declines at a temperature of 60 C., but is not lost 
 until 70 C. is reached. Once their action is lost, 
 it cannot be restored by the addition of normal sera, 
 showing according to Ehrlich, that the precipitins 
 are receptors of the second order and are not ambo- 
 ceptors. The resulting precipitate is soluble in 
 weak acids and alkalies. Peptic digestion destroys 
 the substances which effect the precipitation. 
 Leblanc found that the precipitins were precipitated 
 from the serum in that fraction which Hofmeister 
 calls the pseudo globulins. Eisenberg, on the other 
 hand, in his experiments found them in the eu- 
 globulm fraction. The latter result was also obtained 
 by Obermayer and Pick in precipitins obtained 
 from goats and rabbits. The discordant results 
 are comprehensible in view of recent publications 
 concerning the unreliability of ammonium sulphate 
 fractionation of serum globulins. The nature of 
 the resulting precipitate has also been studied by 
 Leblanc. He finds that it is a combination of the 
 
112 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 precipitated albumin with the antibody of the 
 specific serum. In this combination the properties 
 of the pseudo globulin predominate showing that 
 it is the specific serum which furnishes the greater 
 part of the precipitate. The presence of salts seems 
 to be necessary for the precipitin reaction. A tem- 
 perature of 37 C. hastens, while a low temperature 
 markedly retards the reaction. In either case, the 
 amount of precipitum is uninfluenced. The pres- 
 ence of even small quantities of acids or alkalies 
 markedly reduces the amount of precipitum formed, 
 but an increase of salt (NaCl) has little effect. 
 
 Practical Application. These precipitins have 
 very recently found a practical application. Fish, 
 Ehrlich, Morgenroth, Wassermann, and Schutze 
 investigated the specific action of lactoserum. They 
 found that a serum derived by treating an animal 
 with cows' milk contained a precipitin which reacted 
 only on the casein of cows' milk, but not on that of 
 human milk or goats' milk. The serum of an ani- 
 mal treated with human milk was specific for the 
 casein of human milk, etc. Ehrlich, Morgenroth, 
 and Wassermann also experimented with the serum 
 resulting from treatment with chicken egg albumin, 
 and found that this, while not strictly specific so far 
 as closely related species are concerned, is yet so 
 against other species. The precipitins, therefore, 
 react on closely related albumins, but are specific 
 against those of unrelated species. 
 
PRECIP1TINS 113 
 
 The Wassermann- Uhlenhuth Blood Test. As a 
 result of these researches Wassermann proposed, 
 at the Congress for Internal Medicine, 1900, to use 
 these sera as a means of differentiating albumins, 
 i.e., to distinguish the different albumins from one 
 another, and particularly to distinguish those 
 derived from man from those of other animals. 
 This proposal thus to use the Tchistowitsch-Bordet 
 precipitins had important practical and theoretical 
 results. Uhlenhuth, Wassermann, Schutze, Stern, 
 Dieudonne, and others showed that a serum could 
 be produced from rabbits by injecting them with 
 human serum, by means of which it is possible to 
 tell positively whether a given old, dried blood stain 
 is human blood or not. 
 
 Uhlenhuth * tested nineteen kinds of blood and 
 only obtained a reaction with human blood upon 
 adding antihuman serum to the series of dilutions. 
 He, moreover, found that human blood which had 
 been dried four weeks on a board could be readily 
 distinguished by means of antihuman serum from 
 the blood of the horse and ox. On the following 
 day Wassermann 2 demonstrated experiments simi- 
 lar to Uhlenhuth 's at the meeting of the Physiologi- 
 cal Society, Berlin. Outside of human blood only 
 that of a monkey gave the reaction with anti- 
 human serum. 
 
 1 Uhlenhuth, Deutsche med. Wochenschrift, 1901. xxvii. 
 * Wassermann A. and Schutze, Berliner klin. Wochenschr. 
 1901. No. xxviii. 
 
114 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 The reliability of this reaction in medico-legal 
 questions has been abundantly established. In the 
 forensic blood diagnosis the subjects of the test 
 are usually blood stains on clothing, and on wood 
 and metal objects. After such a doubtful stain 
 has been dissolved in physiological salt solution, 
 one first proceeds to determine that it is really 
 blood. For this purpose Teichmann's test (the 
 production of haemin crystals), the guaiac test, and 
 the spectroscopic examination are undertaken. This 
 is of considerable importance, for not merely blood 
 but other albuminous solutions derived from the 
 same animal react with an antiserum obtained by 
 injecting an animal with blood or serum, ^Having 
 found that the stain is that of blood, we next deter- 
 mine the special kind of blood. 
 
 Immunizing the Animals. For the production of 
 the antisera, we make use of rabbits. These can be 
 injected either with sterile, freshly-defibrinated blood 
 or with sterile serum, the latter being preferable 
 for intravenous inoculation. It is well to begin 
 with small doses and gradually increase; thus for 
 intravenous inoculations the first injection should 
 be about one c.c. and increased up to three or 
 four c.c. With intraperitoneal injections about 
 double these doses can be given. Ordinarily, the 
 interval between injections is three or four days, 
 and the entire duration of treatment from two 
 weeks to a month. Long-continued treatment 
 
PRECIPITINS 115 
 
 leads to a disappearance of precipitins from the 
 blood. 
 
 Collecting the Serum. When the animals have 
 received five to six injections, and some days have 
 elapsed it is well to draw off samples of the blood 
 and to test for precipitins. This is easily done by 
 shaving the ear and cleansing the skin with alcohol 
 and sterile water. An incision is then made into 
 the marginal vein and a few drops of blood collected 
 in a small test-tube. This is then set aside to allow 
 the blood to coagulate. After the serum has sepa- 
 rated it can be tested and if it prove insufficiently 
 powerful, treatment may be continued, otherwise 
 the animal may be killed, preferably a week or ten 
 days after the last injection. The animals may be 
 killed in a variety of ways. Uhlenhuth chloroforms 
 them, opens the thoracic cavity under aseptic 
 precautions, and, cutting through the beating heart, 
 the blood is allowed to flow into the thoracic cavity, 
 whence it is removed by means of sterile pipettes 
 to suitable vessels. Nuttall's method is to shave 
 the neck and disinfect the skin with lysol solution; 
 bend the animal's head backward to put the skin 
 of the neck on the stretch, and have an assistant 
 make a clean sweep with a sterilized knife through 
 the tense skin to and through the vessels. The 
 blood spurts into a large sterile dish which is 
 immediately covered when the main flow has ceased. 
 The dishes are placed horizontally until a clot has 
 
Il6 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 formed ; they are then slightly tilted, and as soon as 
 serum enough has been expressed, this is pipetted 
 off into sterile test containers which are stored in a 
 cool place. It is well not to add any preservative 
 to the serum, as such an addition may occasionally 
 lead to pseudo reactions. 
 
 The Test. In carrying out the test the sus- 
 pected clot is mixed with a small quantity of normal 
 salt solution and then filtered. Whether or not the 
 blood specimen has gone into solution can best be 
 judged by the foam test. Air is blown gently through 
 the pipette which is used for transferring the solu- 
 tion into the test-tubes. Solutions of blood or 
 serum of i : 1000 and over, still foam well. The color 
 of the fluid is not so reliable an index of solution. 
 To some of this solution in a test-tube, about double 
 the amount of the specific serum (derived as above) 
 is added. As a control test, we place a little blood 
 of another species, e.g., of an ox, in a second test- 
 tube together with some of the specific serum and a 
 little normal salt solution. In a third tube we 
 place some of the suspected blood solution, and 'n a 
 fourth some of the specific serum mixed with the 
 normal salt solution. All four tubes are placed in 
 the incubator at 37C. for one hour, or are left at 
 room temperature for several hours. If the sus- 
 pected clot was one of human blood, the first tube 
 will show distinct evidence of precipitation, while 
 all the control tubes will have remained clear. It 
 
PRECIPITINS 
 
 117 
 
 is desirable to dilute the suspected blood as far as 
 possible when testing, for when concentrated sera 
 are brought together reactions may occur which 
 will lead to erroneous conclusions. In medico- 
 legal work it will be well to progressively dilute a 
 suspected blood sample and to reach a conclusion 
 upon the highest (within limits) which reacts to a 
 given antiserum. In routine work one can com- 
 mence with dilutions of the suspected blood of 
 i : 100 or i : 200. We must not omit to say that it 
 is necessary to test to litmus all solutions to be 
 examined, and to neutralize any that are found 
 decidedly acid or alkaline. 
 
 Appearance of the Reaction. When antiserum 
 is added to blood dilution it sinks to the bottom of 
 the tube, forming a milky white zone at the point of 
 contact. The milkiness gradually extends upward 
 until the whole fluid is clouded. Where the fluids 
 have been mixed by shaking this diffuse cloudiness 
 undergoes a change; after ten to twenty minutes, 
 or later, very fine granules of precipitum begin to 
 appear, and the upper layers of the fluid begin to 
 clear, due to sedimentation of the precipitum. 
 The fine particles soon become aggregated into 
 coarser ones, and these into flocculi which, gradually 
 sinking to the bottom of the tube, give rise to more 
 or less deposit of a whitish appearance. With blood 
 dilutions of, say i : 40 to i : 200 and over, the deposit 
 formed is usually sharply defined ; where more con- 
 
Ii8 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 centrated dilutions are used, the deposit may form 
 an irregular mass at the bottom of the tube. 
 
 The reaction may be followed microscopically by 
 means of the hanging-drop method. By this method 
 a reaction can be observed within ten to fifteen 
 minutes, which macroscopically becomes visible 
 only after two hours. 
 
 Delicacy of the Precipitin Test. Whereas the 
 ordinary chemical tests for blood cease to give reac- 
 tions in dilutions of about i : 1000, powerful antisera 
 greatly exceed this limit, as the reported results of 
 independent observers have shown. Working with 
 an antihuman serum, Strube reports a re.action 
 with a blood diluted 20,000 times, and Stern one 
 with a blood diluted 50,000 times. Ascoli obtained 
 a reaction with a specific serum with egg albumin 
 diluted 1,000,000 times. 
 
 Other Applications of the Precipitin Test. It can 
 be readily understood that this test finds ready 
 application in the detection of horse, dog, or cat 
 meat in sausage. 
 
 The principle and the method are the same in all 
 these various applications. We treat animals with 
 the albumins which we wish to differentiate, and so 
 obtain sera specific, each for its particular kind of 
 albumin. These sera, then, produce precipitates 
 only in solutions of their respective albumins. For 
 example, if we wish to determine whether a given 
 
PREC1P1T1NS 
 
 Iig 
 
 sample of meat is horse-flesh or not we must inject 
 an animal with horse serum, or, if we prefer, with 
 an extract of horse-flesh. The serum derived from 
 this animal will then produce a precipitate in the 
 aqueous extract of the meat if this be horse-flesh, 
 but not if it be beef. Animals treated with dog 
 serum yield a serum which precipitates an aqueous 
 extract of dog-flesh, etc. The method of examina- 
 tion consists in scraping the meat and extracting it 
 with water or normal salt solution. It takes a long 
 time to extract the meat in some cases. An extract 
 is suitable for testing when it foams on being shaken. 
 If the extract is very cloudy it should be cleared by 
 filtration through a Berkfeld filter. In testing, add 
 ten to fifteen drops of antiserum to 3 cc. of the 
 saline meat extract. 
 
 Antiprecipitins Iso-precipitins. Biologically, 
 the precipitins are found to behave -like the sub- 
 stances already studied. It is possible, for example, 
 by injecting an animal with a precipltin, say 
 lactoserum, to obtain an antiprecipiiin, an anti- 
 lactoserum, which counteracts or inhibits the 
 action of the precipitin. This is entirely analo- 
 gous to the antihaemolysins, the an tispermo toxin, 
 etc. 
 
 If rabbits are treated with rabbit serum, a serum 
 is obtained which will, in certain cases, precipitate 
 the serum of other rabbits. This was done by 
 
120 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 Schutze, and he called this serum iso-precipitin. 
 Whether or not iso-precipitins ever occur in normal 
 serum has not yet been definitely established. 
 Their occurrence in human serum might be of 
 importance in homologous transfusion. 
 
II. CYTOTOXINS 
 
 Cytotoxins Definition Leucotoxin Nature of 
 the Cytotoxin Anticytotoxin. After it had been 
 found that the injection of an animal with red blood 
 cells of another animal was followed by the produc- 
 tion of definite, specific reaction substances, investi- 
 gators experimented to see whether this was also 
 the case if other animal cells were used. Injections 
 were made with white blood cells, spermatozoa of 
 other animals, etc., and there resulted a series of 
 reaction substances, entirely analogous to the 
 haemolysins, which were specific for the cells used for 
 injection. These sera Metchnikoff calls cytotoxins. 
 After Delezenne had published a short article on a 
 serum haemolytic for white blood cells, Metchnikoff 
 undertook a study of the substances produced in 
 sera of animals treated with leucocytes of another 
 species. He injected guinea pigs with the mesen- 
 teric glands and bone marrow of a rabbit. He 
 also injected for several weeks half an Aselli's pan- 
 creas at a time, at intervals of four days. If he 
 withdrew serum from such a guinea pig he found 
 this to be intensely solvent for white blood cells of 
 a rabbit. He called this serum leucotoxin. This 
 leucotoxin is very poisonous for these animals, and 
 
 121 
 
122 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 kills them within a few hours. Non-fatal doses at 
 first excite a marked hypoleucocytosis, which is 
 followed after a few days by a compensatory hyper- 
 leucocytosis. Leucotoxin destroys the mononu- 
 clear as well as the polynuclear leucocytes of the 
 animal, as was shown by Funk. Leucotoxin which 
 had been derived by injection of the leucocytes of 
 horses, oxen, sheep, goats, or dogs acted only on 
 the leucocytes of that species, not on the leucocytes 
 of man. So far as the mechanism of the cy to toxic 
 action is concerned, it has been found that this is 
 the same as that of the hasmolysins. The action of 
 the specific cytotoxic serum is always due to the 
 combined action of two substances in the serum, a 
 specific immune body, and an alexin or comple- 
 ment present also in normal serum. The cyto- 
 toxic sera, like the haemolytic sera, are rendered 
 inactive by heating to 55 C. In other respects 
 also the cytotoxic sera maintain the analogy to 
 the haemolytic sera. Thus it is possible by immu- 
 nizing with a cy to toxin to obtain an anticytotoxin. 
 MetchnikofT, for example, was able to produce' an 
 antileucotoxin by injecting animals with leuco- 
 toxin. This antibody inhibited the action of the 
 leucotoxin. 
 
 Neurotoxin. Delezenne and Madame Metchni- 
 koff have injected animals with central-nervous- 
 system substance, and so produced a specific neuro- 
 ioxin. They injected ducks intraperitoneally, giving 
 
CYTOTOX1NS 123 
 
 them five or six injections of ten to twenty grammes 
 of dog brain and spinal cord mixed with normal 
 salt solution. The serum of these ducks injected 
 intracerebrally into dogs in doses of 0.5 c.c. 
 caused the dogs to die almost at once in complete 
 paralysis, whereas if normal duck serum was in- 
 jected in the same way no effects of any kind were 
 produced. If smaller doses of the specific neuro- 
 toxic serum were administered, say o.i to 0.2 c.c., 
 various paralyses and epileptiform convulsions set 
 in, from which the animals sometimes recovered. 
 The action of this serum is specific, i.e., the serum 
 of ducks treated with dog brain causes these symp- 
 toms only in dogs, while on rabbits it acts no 
 differently than normal duck serum. 
 
 Spermatoxin. Another specific cell-dissolving 
 serum was produced by Landsteiner, Metchnikoff, 
 and Moxter, by injecting animals with the sperma- 
 tozoa of other animals. Such a serum rapidly 
 destroys the spermatozoa of the animals whose 
 product was injected. This cytotoxin was named 
 spermatoxin. If animals are treated with spermato- 
 zoa there is produced a serum which is not only a 
 spermatoxin, but which is also hasmolytic for the 
 red cells of that animal. This was demonstrated 
 by Metchnikoff and Moxter, and has already been 
 referred to in discussing hsemolysins. If, for ex- 
 ample, we inject the spermatozoa of sheep into 
 rabbits, we shall obtain a serum that is sperma- 
 
124 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 toxic for sheep, as well as haemolytic for sheep 
 red cells. 
 
 Common Receptors. At first it was thought that 
 the haemolysin so produced was due to the presence 
 of small quantities of blood injected with the sper- 
 matozoa. The same result however was obtained 
 when all traces of blood could be excluded ;* further- 
 more a number of investigators produced haemoly- 
 sins by the injection of fluids entirely free from red 
 corpuscles, such as serum and urine. The produc- 
 tion of this haemolysin is not hard to explain if we 
 hold fast to the side-chain theory. We have 
 merely to assume that the spermatozoa or these 
 other substances possess certain receptors in com- 
 mon with the red blood cells of the same animal. 
 Ehrlich and Morgenroth 2 have repeatedly pointed 
 out that specificity is a matter not of cells, but of 
 receptors. Despite these very conclusive demon- 
 strations later investigators, who attempted to 
 produce antisera for the cells of various organs, 
 continued to use emulsions of unwashed organs, in 
 utter disregard of the presence of free receptors in 
 the organ juices and also without consideration of 
 the antibodies certain to be produced by the red 
 cells normally present. 
 
 Cytotoxin for Epithelium. As far back as 1899, 
 
 1 Von Dungern. See "Collected Studies on Immunity, " Ehr- 
 lich-Bolduan, p. 47. Wiley & Sons, New York, 1910. 
 
 2 Ehrlich and Morgenroth. Ibid., p. 100. 
 
CYTOTOX1NS 125 
 
 von Dungern showed that it was possible to produce 
 an antiepithelial serum by treating animals with 
 the ciliated tracheal epithelium of oxen. This 
 serum was rapidly destructive for this particular 
 kind of epithelium, but it contained also a specific 
 haemolytic body just as was the case in the sper- 
 motoxic serum, and for the same reasons. This 
 antiepithelial serum aroused considerable interest 
 since it indicated the possibility of producing sera 
 which were cytotoxic for certain varieties of epi- 
 thelial cells, especially those of pathological origin, 
 as carcinoma. The numerous experiments made 
 in this direction failed however to produce the 
 desired results. Owing to the extensive distribu- 
 tion of common receptors the antisera were found 
 to exhibit quite general properties and to lack 
 that degree of cell specificity, essential for practical 
 purposes. 
 
 Cytotoxins by the Use of Nucleo-Proteids. In 
 order to prevent the adventitious formation of 
 those bodies resulting from impure methods of 
 immunization, and also in the hope of obtaining 
 greater specificity, a few investigators have utilized 
 the nucleo-proteids of the cell for immunization. 
 This method seems to have been tried first by 
 Marrassini in 1903, but with indifferent results. 
 In 1905 Beebe 1 published an extensive study along 
 
 1 S. P. Beebe, Cytotoxic Serum Produced by the Injection 
 of Nucleo-Proteids. Journ. Exper. Medicine, Vol vii, 1905. 
 
126 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 these lines and described the formation of a nephro- 
 toxic serum which caused albuminuria and acute 
 degeneration of the kidney without changes in 
 the other organs. Albuminuria appeared gene- 
 rally on the fourth or fifth day, increased rapidly 
 in amount, and was accompanied by the excretion 
 of hyaline and granular casts. Subsequently Pearce 
 and Jackson, 1 after a careful experimental study on 
 the production of cytotoxic sera by the injection of 
 nucleo-proteids, conclude " that the results do not 
 support the theory that specific cytotox ! c sera may 
 be developed in this way, but indicate, rather, that 
 such sera have certain mildly toxic properties acting 
 in a general way and affecting especially the principal 
 excretory organ, the kidney." 
 
 1 R. M. Pearce and Holmes Jackson, Journal of Infectious 
 Diseases, Vol. iii, 1906. 
 
OPSONINS OR BACTERIOTROPIC 
 SUBSTANCES 
 
 Historical. - - The early work of Nuttall and 
 others on the bactericidal action of normal serum, 
 and Pfeiffer's demonstration of the bacteriolysis 
 of cholera and typhoid bacilli by immune sera in the 
 absence of cells, formed the chief basis on which 
 rested the humoral theory, which attributed the 
 protection in such cases to the destructive action 
 of the serum on the microbes. It was found, how- 
 ever, that cases of protection resulting from the 
 use of immune serum occurred where no such 
 bacteriolytic action could be demonstrated; infec- 
 tion with plague or streptococcus may be men- 
 tioned as examples. It is now pretty generally 
 accepted that immunity in these cases is due largely 
 to the phagocytic action of the leucocytes. As far 
 back as 1858 Haeckel had observed that particles 
 of indigo injected into the veins of certain molluscs 
 could shortly afterwards be found in the blood 
 cells of the animal. However, the significance of 
 this and other observations was not appreciated 
 until Metchnikoff * in 1883 called attention to their 
 bearing on infection and immunity. The outcome 
 
 1 Arbeiten des Zoo log. Institutes in Wien, 1883, Vol. v. 
 
 127 
 
128 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 of his investigations was the establishment of the 
 well-known doctrine of phagocytosis, the principle 
 of which is that the wandering cells of the animal 
 organism, the leucocytes, possess the property of 
 taking up, rendering inert, and digesting micro- 
 organisms which they may encounter in the tissues. 
 Metchnikoff believes that susceptibility to or 
 immunity from infection is essentially a matter 
 between the invading bacteria on the one hand 
 and the leucocytes of the tissues on the other. He 
 realizes that the serum constituents play an im- 
 portant role, but this role consists in their stimulat- 
 ing the leucocyte to take up the bacteria. 
 
 Thus if a highly virulent organism is injected 
 into a susceptible animal, the leucocytes appear to 
 be repelled, and to be unable to deal with the 
 microbe, which multiplies and causes the death of 
 the animal. If, however, the suitable immune 
 serum is injected into the animal before inoculation, 
 the phagocytes attack and devour the invading 
 micro-organisms. Admitting that the phagocyte 
 plays an important part in certain infections the 
 question must still be considered whether the 
 immune serum has acted on the injected microbes 
 or on the phagocytes. Metchnikoff, we have seen, 
 takes the latter view. 
 
 In 1903 A. E. Wright 1 called attention to certain 
 substances present in serum which acted on bacteria 
 
 1 Wright and Douglas, Proc. Royal Society, Vol. 72, 1903. 
 
OPSONINS 129 
 
 and rendered them mere easily taken up by the 
 phagocytic cells. He called this substance opsonin 
 and showed that it is present in normal as well as 
 immune sera. By means of absorption tests 
 modelled after those of Ehrlich and Morgenroth, he 
 showed that the opsonin has a specific affinity for 
 the bacteria and none for the leucocytes. The 
 opsonins for staphylococcus prepare only staphy- 
 lococci for the leucocytes, those for tubercle bacilli 
 only these bacteria, etc. As a result of his obser- 
 vations Wright supposes that the phagocytes play 
 only a passive r6le, which depends on the pre- 
 liminary action of the opsonin. 
 
 Bacteriotropic Substances. - - Independently of 
 Wright, though somewhat later, Neufeld and Rim- 
 pau l of Berlin published experiments on the pha- 
 gocytic effect of immune sera. They also found 
 that in these sera there exists a substance which has 
 no direct action on the phagocytes, but which can 
 fix itself on the corresponding bacteria and so modify 
 these that they are more readily devoured by the 
 phagocytes. They call this constituent a " bacte- 
 riotropic substance." There is little doubt that this 
 bacteriotropic substance and Wright's opsonin are 
 identical. Certain differences in the effect of heat 
 are probably to be explained by the differences in 
 the quantities of these sensitizing substances in 
 normal and immune sera. 
 
 1 Neufeld and Rimpau, Deutsche med. Wochenschrift, 1904. 
 
IMMUNE SERA 
 
 Opsonins Distinct Antibodies. It was natural to 
 question whether these " opsonins " were really dis- 
 tinct from other antibodies, or whether they were 
 perhaps identical with the immune body (or sub- 
 stance sensibilatrice). In a series of papers on this 
 subject Hektoen l shows that the former is the case, 
 opsonins are distinct substances. This is not only 
 indicated by the results of absorption tests, but by 
 the fact that, by immunization, a serum can in cer- 
 tain cases be obtained which is opsonic but not lytic, 
 or in other cases one which is lytic but not opsonic. 
 Similar experiments have differentiated opsonins 
 from agglutinins. 
 
 Structure of Opsonins. In structure the opso- 
 nins are like the agglutinins. Following Ehrlich's 
 conceptions they possess two groups, opsoniferous 
 end haptophore. On heating an opsonic serum 
 the former group is destroyed, but the haptophore 
 group remains intact, as can be seen from suitable 
 combining experiments. There is still consider- 
 able difference of opinion as to the degree of heat 
 necessary to inactivate the opsonins. Once the 
 opsoniferous group has been destroyed it is impos- 
 sible to restore the opsonic action by the addition 
 of a complementing substance. Hence the opsonins 
 are to be regarded as receptors of the second order 
 and similar in structure to the agglutinins and 
 precipitins. In this connection it will be we.ll to 
 
 1 Hektoen, L., Journal Infect. Diseases, 1905 and 1906. 
 
OPSONJNS I3 i 
 
 remember Bordet's objections to the assumption 
 of two groups in the agglutinin molecule. These 
 have already been considered oh page 40. 
 
 The Opsonic Index. In the study of these opso- 
 nins Wright developed the idea that they were 
 highly important in combating a number of bacterial 
 infections, such as staphylococcus and tubercle. 
 His observations showed that inoculations of the 
 corresponding bacteria produced marked changes in 
 the opsonic contents of the infected individual and 
 that it was possible to estimate accurately the im- 
 munizing effect of such inoculations. 
 
 Technique. Wright's technique of measuring the 
 opsonic power is a slight modification of the Leish- 
 man l method and is as follows : An emulsion of 
 fresh human leucocytes is made by dropping twenty 
 drops of blood from a finger prick into 20 c.c. 
 normal salt solution containing one per cent sodium 
 citrate. The mixture is centrifuged, the supernatant 
 clear fluid, removed and the upper layers of the sedi- 
 mented blood cells transferred by means of a fine 
 pipette to 10 c.c. normal salt solution. After cen- 
 trifuging this second mixture the supernatant fluid 
 is pipetted off and the remaining suspension used 
 for the opsonic tests. Such a " leucocyte emulsion, ' 
 of course, contains an enormous number of red 
 blood cells; the proportion of leucocytes, however, 
 is greater than in the original blood. 
 
 1 Leishman, British Medical Journal, Jan., 1902. 
 
132 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 One volume of this emulsion is mixed with one 
 volume of the bacterial suspension to be tested and 
 with one volume of the serum. This is best accom- 
 plished by means of a pipette whose end has been 
 drawn out into a capillary tube several inches in 
 length. With a mark made about three-quarters 
 of an inch from the end it is easy to suck up one such 
 volume of each of the fluids, allowing a imall air 
 bubble to intervene between each volume. All 
 three are now expelled on a slide and thoroughly 
 mixed by drawing back and forth into the pipette. 
 Then the mixture is sucked into the pipette, the end 
 sealed and the whole put into the incubator at 37 C. 
 The identical test is made using a normal serum in 
 place of the serum to be tested. Both tubes are 
 allowed to incubate fifteen minutes and then ex- 
 amined by means of smear preparations on slides 
 spread and stained in the usual way. The degree of 
 phagocytosis is then determined in each by count- 
 ing a consecutive series of fifty leucocytes and find- 
 ing the average number of bacteria ingested per 
 leucocyte. This number for the serum to be tested 
 is divided by the number obtained with the normal 
 serum and the result regarded as the opsonic index 
 of the serum in question. The presence of a high 
 opsonic index Wright regards as indicative of in- 
 creased resistance. He further states that the fluc- 
 tuation of the opsonic index in normal healthy 
 individuals is not more than from .8 to 1.2, and that 
 
OPSONINS 
 
 133 
 
 an index below .8 is therefore almost diagnostic of 
 the presence of an infection with the organism tested. 
 Application of the Opsonic Measurements. At 
 the present time Wright has correlated all his obser- 
 vations and built up a system of treating bacterial 
 infections by means of active immunization con- 
 trolled by opsonic measurements. The principles 
 underlying his method may be briefly summarized 
 as follows: In localized bacterial infections the 
 infected body absorbs but small amounts of bacterial 
 substances or antigens. In consequence of this the 
 amount of active immunity developed is but slight. 
 Localized infections therefore tend to run a chronic 
 course. The logical method of effecting a cure in 
 these cases is to actively immunize the body with 
 the invading organism. In a number of infections, 
 notably those of staphylococcus, streptococcus, and 
 tubercle, the degree of immunity is measured accu- 
 rately by the opsonic index. Following an inocu- 
 lation with the infecting bacteria (dead cultures in 
 salt solution) there is first a drop in the opsonic 
 index, the " negative phase," then, depending on 
 the size of the dose and the reacting power of the 
 individual, there comes a rise of the index, the 
 " positive phase," or a continuation of the negative 
 phase. The former is obtained with proper dosage ; 
 the latter with doses too large or too small. In 
 estimating the size of the dose given, Wright counts 
 the number of bacteria per c.c. of emulsion injected. 
 
134 IMMUXE SERA 
 
 Thus in the case of localized staphylococcus infec- 
 tions the doses for adult humans range from 100 
 million to 500 million bacteria. In the case of strep- 
 tococcus the doses are smaller, averaging about 50 
 to 100 million. The bacterial suspensions are heated 
 to 60 C. for twenty minutes, 0.5% carbolic acid 
 is added, and tests are made to insure sterility. 
 The time for inoculation is governed by the opsonic 
 index. If the first inoculation has been properly 
 gauged there is a brief negative phase, followed by 
 a positive phase of some days' duration. As this 
 positive phase gradually drops, one gives another 
 inoculation and watches the effect on .the opsonic 
 index. If the index drops markedly and rises but 
 little, the dose has been too large. Or if the nega- 
 tive phase is slight, and the positive phase slight and 
 transitory, the dose has been too small. With 
 proper dosage the negative phases are small, and the 
 opsonic index is kept fairly well above normal. 
 Hand in hand with this goes an improvement in the 
 clinical symptoms. 
 
 Wright and his pupils have published accounts of 
 a large number of cases successfully treated accord- 
 ing to this method. The results are reported as espe- 
 cially good in cases of severe acne, multiple boils, 
 lupus, tubercular glands, and bone tuberculosis. 
 
 In judging of the value of Wright's method we 
 must bear clearly in mind that the essential feature 
 of it is the control by opsonic measurements; treat- 
 
OPSONINS 135 
 
 ment of bacterial infections by the inoculation of 
 dead cultures has long been known. 
 
 The results obtained by most workers in this coun- 
 try fail to bear out Wright's claims for the method. 
 Thus the author 1 finds that the variation in the 
 opsonic indices of several normal persons is often 
 considerable; that opsonic counts based on fifty 
 leucocytes may occasionally vary by more than 
 50% and that it is therefore necessary to count from 
 150 to 200 leucocytes for each test; that duplicate, 
 triplicate and more tests made of the same serum, 
 at the same time, and under identical conditions so 
 far as one can tell, frequently give widely divergent 
 results; that the opsonic index and the clinical 
 course of the disease do not always run parallel. 
 Cases may do very well and have the index remain 
 low; other cases may do poorly with an increased 
 opsonic index. It is to be noted, furthermore, that 
 some of these variations in results are unavoidable, 
 at least with the present technique. 
 
 To one who has followed the progress of immunity 
 studies, it is not at all surprising to find that the 
 opsonic index is not necessarily a measure of the 
 patient's immunity. When Gruber and Durham 
 published their observations on agglutinins the 
 phenomenon was at once Hailed and interpreted by 
 many as measuring the degree of immunity possessed 
 by the patient. The same error was made when 
 
 1 Bolduan, Long Island Med. Journal, Vol. i, 1907. 
 
IMMUNE SERA 
 
 some time later the bacteriolytic substances were 
 discovered. In both cases it was soon found that 
 these were but accompaniments of greater or less 
 significance to the complex phenomenon of immun- 
 ity. When we consider how manifold are the defen- 
 sive agencies which the animal organism possesses, 
 and how very complex they become the more they 
 are studied, we shall not marvel at the absence of 
 parallelism between the clinical course of the disease 
 and the opsonic index. There is little doubt that 
 the opsonic indices do measure a certain fraction or 
 phase of the immunity reaction; we do not believe 
 that they replace clinical observations in measuring 
 the effect of immunizing injections. 
 
VII. SNAKE VENOMS AND THEIR ANTISERA 
 
 Despite the fact that venomous serpents have 
 excited the fear and interest of mankind for centuries 
 it is only very recently that we have come to know 
 anything definite about their poisons. This is 
 perhaps in part due to the fact that Europe possesses 
 but few poisonous snakes, and so offered little 
 material for study. Some idea of the importance 
 of the subject for certain countries, however, can be 
 seen when it is stated that in India more than 
 20,000 persons annually die from the bite of the 
 hooded cobra. It was quite natural, therefore, that 
 one of the earliest modern researches into the 
 nature of snake venom, that of Calmette, 1 should 
 have come from that country. This author also 
 found that he could produce an antitoxic serum by 
 injecting animals with the snake venom. 
 
 The Venoms. Our present knowledge of snake 
 venoms and their antisera is due largely to the 
 researches of Flexner and Noguchi 2 and of Kyes 
 and Sachs. 3 The venoms of different snakes vary 
 
 1 Calmette, Annal. Inst. Pasteur, Vol. vi, 1892; Comptes 
 rend. Soc. Biol., 1894. 
 
 2 Flexner and Noguchi, Journal Exp. Medicine, 1902, et seq. 
 s Kyes and Sachs. See in Collected Studies on Immunity, 
 
 Ehrlich-Bolduan, New York, 1910. 
 
138 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 a great deal in their toxic properties, and this is 
 due to their relative contents of different consti- 
 tuents, as follows:' haemagglutinins, haemolysin, 
 hsemorrhagin, and neurotoxin. The first two act 
 exclusively on the blood cells, the haemorrhagin on 
 the endothelium of the blood vessels, and the 
 neurotoxin on the cells of the central nervous 
 system. The last named causes death by paralysis 
 of the cardiac and respiratory centers. The ven- 
 oms of the cobra, water-moccasin, daboia and 
 some poisonous sea snakes are essentially neuro- 
 toxic, although they have strong dissolving powers 
 for the erythrocytes of some animals. In study- 
 ing the haemolytic powers of the venoms of cobra, 
 copperhead, and rattlesnake, Flexner and Noguchi 
 found cobra venom to be the most haemolytic and 
 that of rattlesnake the least. They attribute the 
 toxicity of rattlesnake poison chiefly to the action 
 of haemorrhagin. The venoms of the water mocca- 
 sin and the copperhead also contain haemorrhagin. 
 
 Unlike the bacterial toxins the action of the snake 
 venoms is preceded by no appreciable incubation 
 period. In addition to this the poisons are very 
 rapidly absorbed. Thus Calmette found that a rat 
 inoculated into the tip of the tail could not be saved 
 by amputating the tail orie minute later. Such 
 animals died within about five minutes of the time 
 required for control animals. 
 
 The haemolysin and neurotoxin and perhaps also 
 
SNAKE VENOMS AND THEIR ANTISERA 139 
 
 the other cytotoxic substances of venom consist of 
 amboceptors which find a complement in the body 
 of the poisoned animal. Not only does ordinary 
 serum-complement serve for activation, but, accord- 
 ing to Noguchi, 1 the fatty acids contained in the red 
 blood cells also act as complement. Lecithin is 
 also able to reactivate the haemolysins of cobra 
 venom, forming, according to Kyes, a "cobra- 
 lecithid." Recent experiments by Manwaring, 2 
 however, show that the product obtained by Kyes 
 was really a venom-free lecithin derivative and not 
 a "lecithid." 
 
 Antivenins. Calmette was the first to produce 
 an antiserum against snake venom, utilizing for 
 this purpose rabbits. He began with injections of 
 Jv of a fatal dose, and injected gradually increasing 
 doses until at the end of four or five weeks the 
 animals tolerated double a fatal dose. By con- 
 tinuing the treatment he finally got the animals 
 to stand 80 fatal doses (40 mg.) without any 
 reaction whatever. Five drops of the serum of such 
 an animal neutralized i mg. cobra poison. It 
 has been found that anticobra serum protects 
 against the neurotoxic " components of other snake 
 venoms, furthermore against scorpion poison and 
 the poison of eel blood. The serum also contains 
 
 1 Noguchi, Journ. Exper. Medicine, Vol. ix, 1907. 
 
 2 Manwaring, Johns Hopkins Hospital Bulletin, September, 
 1910, 
 
140 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 an antihaemolysin, but no antibody against haemor- 
 rhagin (of the rattlesnake). It is therefore without 
 effect on rattlesnake venom. Antivenin for the 
 latter may be prepared by immunizing goats with 
 corresponding venoms which have been attenuated 
 by weak acids. Such a serum, of course, possesses 
 no antineurotoxin and is therefore useless against 
 cobra and viper venoms. 
 
VIII. ANAPHYLAXIS 
 
 Historical. In 1898 Richet and Hericourt showed 
 that when dogs were injected with eel serum they 
 not only failed to develop an immunity against this 
 poison, but actually became more susceptible. 
 Subsequently they made similar observations with 
 a toxin, mytilo-congestin, isolated from mussels. 
 Richet applied the term " anaphylaxis " to this 
 phenomenon to distinguish it from immunization 
 or prophylaxis. Arthus, in 1903, reported that 
 similar effects could be obtained with substances 
 ordinarily not poisonous. Thus he found that if 
 rabbits were injected with horse serum they were 
 rendered very susceptible to a second injection 
 made after an interval of six to eight days. The 
 second injection produced severe symptoms, and 
 sometimes led to death in these animals. Little 
 or no attention was paid to these observations. Fol- 
 lowing a statement made to him by Theobald Smith 
 in 1904, Ehrlich caused his pupil, Otto, to study 
 why guinea pigs which had been injected with 
 toxin-antitoxin mixtures in the course of standard- 
 ization of diphtheria antitoxin, should so often be 
 killed by a subsequent injection of horse serum. 
 
 Independently of this the subject was being investi- 
 
 141 
 
1 42 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 gated by Rosenau and Anderson in the Hygienic 
 Laboratory. Almost simultaneously with the ap- 
 pearance of these studies came a comprehensive 
 monograph on the serum rashes by v. Pirquet and 
 Schick, and this fitted in so well with the labora- 
 tory studies of Otto and of Rosenau and Anderson 
 that a great deal of interest was aroused in this 
 subject. 
 
 The Phenomenon. As a result of all the work 
 that has been done we now know that when an 
 animal is injected with an alien proteid, there 
 develops, after a time, a specific hypersusceptibility 
 for this proteid. After a definite interval if the 
 animal is given a second injection of the same 
 proteid, violent symptoms appear, often leading 
 to the death of the animal. The reaction is specific, 
 so that animals sensitized, for example, to horse 
 serum, manifest little of no hypersusceptibility 
 to other sera. It is possible, however, to sensitize 
 an animal to several proteids simultaneously. The 
 sensitizing dose may be very small -even as little 
 as one millionth cubic centimeter of horse serum 
 has sufficed to render guinea pigs sensitive. A 
 varying length of time must elapse after the sen- 
 sitizing injection before the animal becomes fully 
 sensitized. In guinea pigs injected with small doses 
 of horse serum, from twelve to fourteen days 
 suffices. With larger doses, however, the time 
 required is much longer, and may extend over 
 
ANAPH YLAXIS 143 
 
 weeks or even months. The hypersusceptibility 
 is transmitted from mother to offspring, and may 
 also be passively transferred to other animals by 
 transferring some of the serum of the sensitized 
 animal to normal animals. Animals recovering 
 from the symptoms induced by the second injection 
 are thereafter no longer hypersensitive to the pro- 
 teid employed, but are immune. This immunity 
 is spoken of as " antianaphylaxis." This condi- 
 tion can also be brought about artifically by inject- 
 ing the animals after they have received their 
 sensitizing injection and just before the end of 
 the anaphylactic incubation time, with compara- 
 tively large quantities of the same proteid. Rosenau 
 and Anderson have shown that animals may be 
 sensitized by feeding them with the proteid. 
 Whether this has any practical application to the 
 clinical use of specific immune sera derived from 
 horses in persons habitually eating horse flesh is not 
 known. 
 
 Serum Rashes. Turning our attention for a 
 moment to the serum rashes, we find that in 1874 
 Dallera reported that urticarial eruptions might 
 follow the transfusion of blood. Neudorfer as well 
 as Landois also refer to this complication. In the 
 year 1894 the use of diphtheria antitoxin introduced 
 the widespread practice of injecting human beings 
 with horse serum. In the same year several cases 
 were reported in which these injections were fol- 
 
I 4 4 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 lowed by various skin manifestations, mostly of 
 an urticarial character. Following these came 
 a great mass of evidence which made it clear that 
 following the injection of antidiphtheric serum 
 these sequelae were usually comparatively harmless. 
 Heubner in 1894 and von Bokay somewhat later 
 expressed the opinion that these manifestations 
 were due to other properties than the antitoxin 
 in the serum, and this has proved to be the case. 
 Johannessen produced the same effects by injecting 
 normal horse serum. It has been shown that the 
 skin eruptions and other symptoms follow in direct 
 proportion to the amount of serum injected, a fact 
 which has led to the concentration of the sera by 
 getting rid of the non-antitoxic proteid constituents. 
 In their exhaustive study, already mentioned, 
 v. Pirquet and Schick described the various clinical 
 manifestations following the injection of horse serum 
 into man, and gave the name " serum disease " to 
 the symptom complex. The principal symptoms 
 of this disease are a period of incubation varying 
 in length from eight to thirteen days, fever, skin 
 eruptions, swelling of the lymph glands, leucopenia 
 joint symptoms, oedema, and albuminuria. 
 
 Theories of Anaphylaxis. It was difficult tc 
 account for the long period of incubation in the pro- 
 duction of these serum rashes. With poisons 
 capable of self -multiplication (bacteria, etc.), this 
 period was usually referred to the time necessary 
 
ANAPHYLAXIS 
 
 for them to accumulate in sufficient number 
 and virulence to produce symptoms. But serum 
 is not a poison capable of multiplication. 
 Pfeiffer's work on the endo toxins led to the view 
 that the antibodies played an important part in 
 bringing on the symptoms by setting free the endo- 
 toxins. The results of these observations are very 
 closely related to von Pirquet and Schick's explan- 
 ation of the production of serum disease. The 
 endotoxin theory, in the sense of bacteriolysis, 
 naturally cannot be applied to albuminous sub- 
 stances in solution. We can only accept it in the 
 sense that by means of the reaction between the 
 antibodies and the antigen the poisonous substance 
 is formed. The period of incubation, both in serum 
 rashes and in bacterial infections, is thus readily 
 understood, for it is at once apparent that the 
 formation of antibodies requires time. The 
 general idea underlying von Pirquet and Schick's 
 theory of serum disease is that the injection of the 
 horse serum into man causes the development of 
 specific reaction products which are able to act upon 
 the antigens introduced. These antibodies encoun- 
 ter the antigens, i.e., some of the serum still present 
 in the body, and so give rise to a poisonous sub- 
 stance. This accounts also for the cases of " imme- 
 diate reaction" described by von Pirquet and Schick 
 in which the second injection of a serum produces 
 an attack of serum disease without any period of 
 
146 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 incubation. Here the second injection comes at a 
 time when the accumulation of antibodies is at its 
 height. It has been claimed that this explains the 
 cases of sudden death in humans following injec- 
 tions of serum, but investigation shows that most 
 of these deaths occurred after but a single injection 
 of serum. Moreover in most of them such conditions 
 as status lymphaticus sufficed to explain the fatal 
 ending. 
 
 This theory has found some experimental con- 
 firmation from the work of Vaughan and Wheeler, 
 who have been able to prepare a number of split 
 products from the proteid molecule, some of which 
 in animals give- rise to a symptom complex not 
 unlike that of typical anaphylaxis. 
 
 Gay and Southard hold a somewhat different 
 view. According to them the " horse serum con- 
 tains a substance, anaphylactin, which is not neu- 
 tralized, and is eliminated from the body with great 
 slowness. When a normal guinea pig is injected 
 with a small amount of horse serum, the greater 
 part of its elements are rapidly eliminated; the 
 anaphylactin, however, remains and acts as a 
 constant irritant to the body cells, so that their 
 avidity for the other assimilable elements of horse 
 serum which have accompanied the anaphylactin 
 becomes enormously increased. At the end of two 
 weeks of constant stimulation on the part of the 
 anaphylactin, and of increasing avidity on the part 
 
ANAPHYLAXIS 
 
 of the somatic cells, a condition has arrived when 
 the cells, if suddenly presented with a large 
 amount of horse serum, are overwhelmed in the 
 exercise of their assimilating functions, and func- 
 tional equilibrium is so disturbed that local or 
 general death may follow." According to this view 
 the intoxication caused by the second injection 
 depends upon constituents of the serum eliminable 
 by the animal body. 
 
 Allergy. It is apparent that what has been said 
 concerning the production of anaphylaxis in re- 
 sponse to serum injections will apply also to bac- 
 terial infections, for in these the body is injected, 
 as it were, with bacterial proteids. The phenomena 
 of anaphylaxis are therefore of general application in 
 immunity. This is well expressed by von Pirquet, 1 
 who calls attention to the fact that the main differ- 
 ence between a normal and an immune individual 
 is one relating to the alteration in the latter's re- 
 activity. He speaks of this alteration as "allergy" : 
 from ergeia, reactivity, and allos, altered, meaning 
 thereby a changed reactivity as a clinical conception 
 unprejudiced by bacteriological, pathological or 
 biological findings. This alteration may relate to 
 the quality and quantity of the symptoms and to 
 their rate of development. Allergy seems to be 
 associated more with some infections than with 
 others. Experimentally it can best be studied by 
 
 1 C. E. von Pirquet, Archives of Internal Medicine, Feb., 191 r. 
 
148 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 observing the effect of cow-pox inoculation in 
 primary and subsequent vaccinations. The re- 
 vaccinated overcomes the whole process with a very 
 slight local reaction a few millimeters in size, while 
 the person vaccinated the first time shows extensive 
 local inflammation, fever, and other general symp- 
 toms. If the reaction is studied on the day follow- 
 ing the vaccination, we shall find that the re- 
 vaccinated is really hypersensitive, because at this 
 time the first vaccinated does not show any reaction, 
 while the revaccinated responds with a local inflam- 
 matory process. In tuberculosis, glanders, and 
 other infections the injection of extracts of the 
 infecting bacterium (tuberculin, mallein, etc.) pro- 
 duces characteristic local and general symptoms, 
 because of the specific hypersensitive condition 
 present in such infections. These reactions can 
 therefore be employed in the diagnosis of such in- 
 fections. The symptoms of hay fever, and of urti- 
 caria appear to be merely examples of proteid 
 hypersensi ti ven ess . 
 
 Supposed Relation to Precipitin Action. 
 Attempts have also been made to associate the 
 phenomena of anaphylaxis with the action of pre- 
 cipitins. Hamburger and Moro were the first (1903) 
 who found that man forms precipitins after the 
 injection of horse serum. Precipitin was present 
 after the appearance of serum rashes ; therefore they 
 suggested a connection between serum exanthem 
 
ANAPHYLAXIS 
 
 149 
 
 and precipitin formation, without looking on the 
 precipitation itself as the cause of the rash. More 
 recently Doerr anci Russ, as the result of experi- 
 ments, hold that the phenomena of anaphylaxis are 
 due to a reaction between precipitins attached to 
 the tissue cells, and the precipitable antigen. The 
 anaphylactic shock is looked upon as an intracellu- 
 lar precipitin reaction. In quantitative investiga- 
 tions these authors showed that the amount of 
 anaphylactic antibody in the serum of rabbits 
 was always parallel to its precipitin content. It 
 has also been found that animals which do not form 
 precipitins, like white mice, are incapable also of 
 forming the anaphylactic antibody. Against the 
 view that precipitins have anything to do with 
 anaphylaxis in man is the fact that the symptoms 
 of serum disease appear within eight to thirteen 
 days following the first injection of horse serum, 
 whereas it requires about three weeks for precipi- 
 tins to appear in the blood in children after the 
 injection of horse serum. Furthermore, the forma- 
 tion of precipitins does not take place as readily 
 in man following the injection of horse serum as 
 it does in rabbits. In fact von Pirquet found that 
 sometimes even after the injection of 200 cc. there 
 was no production of precipitins. Finally it may 
 be remembered that there is no evidence that the 
 precipitin action is other than a test-tube phenom- 
 enon, or that it ever occurs in vivo. Friedemann 
 
1 50 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 has shown that the precipitates produced in vitro 
 will, when injected intravenously into animals, pass 
 through the capillaries without harmful effects. 
 
 Pathology of Anaphylactic Shock. Acute ana- 
 phylactic death in guinea-pigs was originally attrib- 
 uted to asphyxia of central origin. Auer and 
 Lewis, 1 however, showed that the asphyxia is due 
 to a tetanic contraction of the bronchial muscle, 
 the contraction being so pronounced that the lumina 
 of the smaller bronchi are occluded, thus preventing 
 both the entrance and the escape of air. In a 
 recent study of the subject, Schultz and Jordan 2 
 show that in guinea-pigs the point of occlusion is 
 usually just beyond the place where the secondary 
 bronchi leave the primary, and in all cases at points 
 commanding large areas of lung tissue. At this 
 point there is the greatest relative (to diameter of 
 lumen) amount of smooth muscle, and there is also 
 normally a thicker mucosa and greater degree of 
 folding of the same relative to the lumen. The 
 fatal asphyxia observed in guinea-pigs is therefore 
 due to the peculiar anatomical condition of the 
 bronchial tree in these animals. In white mice 
 the anaphylactic reaction shows itself by increased 
 peristalsis, contractions of the bladder, increased 
 irritability of the skin, etc. The respiratory symp- 
 
 1 Auer and Lewis, Journal Exp. Medicine, Vol. xli, 1910. 
 
 2 Schultz and Jordan, Journal Pharmacol. and Exp. Thera- 
 peutics, Vol. ii, March, 1911. 
 
ANAPHYLAXIS 
 
 toms are absent. This is clearly because the mucosa 
 of the bronchial tree is nowhere sufficiently thick 
 or folded, relative to the amount of muscle and to 
 the diameter of lumen, to produce occlusion under the 
 amount of constriction produced by the contracting 
 musculature. The recent work of Schultz shows 
 that serum anaphylaxis is essentially a hyper- 
 sensitization of smooth muscle generally. 
 
 It is possible that the occasional occurrence of 
 severe symptoms and even of death in man follow- 
 ing the injection of serum is sometimes due to an 
 abnormal development or condition of the mucous 
 membrane and smooth muscle of the bronchi. 
 Some support is given to this view by the more 
 frequent occurrence of these disturbances in asth- 
 matic individuals. 
 
 Relation of Anaphylaxis to Serum Therapy. 
 Returning now to the relation of the experimental 
 work in anaphylaxis to serum therapy, attention 
 should be called to the work of Steinhardt and Banz- 
 haf, who show that the anaphylactic reaction in 
 rabbits differs considerably in character from that 
 observed in guinea-pigs. These authors, therefore, 
 warn against utilizing the results of experiments on 
 guinea-pigs without reservation for the interpreta- 
 tion of phenomena observed in human beings. It 
 is probable that man cannot be sensitized in the 
 same way as guinea pigs, the most susceptible of 
 the laboratory animals. Children have in numerous 
 
152 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 instances been injected with antidiphtheric horse 
 serum at short and long intervals, without, so far 
 as we are aware, causing death. Certain serums, 
 for example, the anti tubercle serum of Maragliano 
 and the antirheumatic serum of Menzer, are habit- 
 ually used by giving injections at intervals of days 
 or weeks. It may, of course, be pbjected that 
 possibly these injections are so spaced as to produce 
 antianaphylaxis. If a person had once before had 
 an injection of horse serum, would it be safe, say 
 some months, or a year, or several years later, to 
 give him another injection of horse serum? Or if 
 a child had been immunized against diphtheria 
 would it be safe to repeat the injection a year 
 later if the child were again exposed? The exper- 
 ience of clinicians is practically unanimous in show- 
 ing that such second injections need not be feared. 
 Even if the results obtained in guinea pigs were 
 applicable to man, a subcutaneous injection in man 
 comparable to the amount required to produce 
 sickness in a guinea pig would be over 200 cc. 
 To date about twenty cases of sudden death follow- 
 ing the injection of horse serum have been recorded 
 in the literature, and while this undoubtedly does 
 not represent all the cases that have occurred, the 
 total number is insignificant when compared to the 
 enormous number of such injections already made. 
 In New York City, in over 50,000 persons injected, 
 but two deaths attributed to the serum injection 
 
ANAPHYLAXIS ! 53 
 
 have occurred. A number of fatal cases have been 
 reported in asthmatic individuals, and this may be 
 borne in mind when about to make serum injec- 
 tions. It is also of interest to know that Banzhaf 
 and Famulener have shown that chloral in large 
 doses will prevent the anaphylactic reaction in 
 sensitized guinea pigs. Such animals after the 
 second injection are immune to further injections. 
 
IX. INFECTION AND IMMUNITY 
 
 Infection. In the preceding chapters we have 
 studied the formation and mode of action of the 
 various antibodies. Let us now summarize briefly 
 our knowledge concerning the factors involved 
 in infection and immunity. An infectious disease 
 is one caused by a living organism wiiich has gained 
 access to the tissues of the body. A study of 
 infection and immunity, therefore, embraces a 
 study of the pathogenesis of these organisms on the 
 one hand and of the defensive agencies of the body 
 on the other. So far as the invading organism 
 is concerned, we know that this may remain localized 
 or be widespread through the body. The absorption 
 of chemical products from a local infection may 
 produce general symptoms. This is known as an 
 intoxication, and is observed in cholera, diphtheria, 
 tetanus, local abscess, etc. In general we apply 
 the term ' pathogenic ' to organisms capable of 
 producing disease, but it must be borne in mind 
 that this is a relative term, for an organism patho- 
 genic for one species of animal need not necessarily 
 be pathogenic for another species. 
 
 The Infecting Agent. In studying the patho- 
 genicity of various bacteria, it is apparent that 
 
 154 
 
* INFECTION AND IMMUNITY 155 
 
 we can distinguish several classes of organisms. 
 One class is characterized by the secretion of 
 highly toxic soluble substances, both in the living 
 body and in the culture fluid. The type of this 
 class is the diphtheria bacillus. Another class pro- 
 duces highly toxic substances, which instead of 
 being given off, remain within the body of the 
 bacterium. These poisons may be demonstrated 
 in old cultures in which a certain amount of dis- 
 solution (" autolysis ") has taken place, or they 
 may be obtained by mechanically breaking up the 
 bacteria by pressure and grinding. These sub- 
 stances are spoken of as endotoxins, and are liber- 
 ated in the body when the bacteria are disintegrated 
 by the bacteriolytic agencies. The type of this 
 class is the spirillum of cholera, an organism which 
 produces a powerful endotoxin and which very 
 readily undergoes bacteriolysis. In addition to 
 these two classes we know of a large number of 
 bacteria which neither secrete a highly toxic soluble 
 substance as do diphtheria bacilli nor disintegrate 
 as readily as the cholera spirilla, and which never- 
 theless are extremely pathogenic. Hiss has sug- 
 gested that many organisms, if not all, secrete sub- 
 stances which are not soluble in their condition 
 at secretion, but which are susceptible to digestion 
 in the animal body. These substances thus become 
 soluble and assimilable, and when toxic act harm- 
 fully on the body cells. Under ordinary circum- 
 
156 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 stances these substances are broken up within the 
 leucocytes and the poisons . thus set free at once 
 neutralized by neutralizing bodies present within 
 the cells. According to this, conception the leu- 
 cocytes exercise a double function, one bactericidal 
 and bacteriolytic, the other a poison-neutralizing 
 one. The bactericidal and bacteriolytic bodies 
 appear to escape from the leucocytes quite readily, 
 and can be demonstrated in the blood plasma; the 
 neutralizing bodies, on the other hand, do not appear 
 to be given off from the cell. It is obvious, there- 
 fore, that the bacterial substances may be broken 
 up in the blood plasma, and from them may thus 
 be liberated a poisonous body. When this poison- 
 ous body is assimilated in sufficient quantity by the 
 higher cells of the animal organism, death ensues, 
 and ensues the more quickly the more rapid the 
 process of liberation. 
 
 In discussing allergy it was pointed out that the 
 phenomena of anaphylaxis should also be applied to 
 bacterial infections, because in these the body was 
 treated with small doses of bacterial proteid. As a 
 result of his studies, Friedberger concludes that it is 
 unnecessary to assume the existence of specific endo- 
 toxins in bacteria to account for the various symp- 
 toms seen in bacterial infections. By repeatedly 
 injecting sensitized animals with minute doses of 
 sheep or horse serum, he found it possible to produce 
 all manner of fever curves at will, merely by varying 
 
INFECTION AND IMMUNITY 157 
 
 the size of the dose and the interval between injec- 
 tions. From this he concludes that the diversity 
 of clinical symptoms of various infectious diseases 
 can readily be explained on the assumption of but 
 a single poison. He speaks of it as anaphylatoxin, 
 and regards it as a cleavage product of proteid of 
 whatever origin introduced parenterally. Just as in 
 enteral digestion uniform cleavage products are 
 formed from most diverse proteids, so he believes 
 that in the parenteral proteid decomposition lead- 
 ing to the formation of anaphylatoxin, a uniform 
 poison is produced. Whether or not in addition to 
 the anaphylatoxin there are other specific poisons for 
 the various infectious diseases is entirely immaterial ; 
 their existence has not been proved 1 and the as- 
 sumption of their existence is unnecessary. In con- 
 sidering the diversity of the clinical symptoms of 
 various infectious diseases, it must be remembered 
 that the various species of bacteria differ in their 
 virulence and in their rate of multiplication, and 
 the invaded organisms also differ considerably in 
 their antibody production. All these factors serve 
 to modify the clinical picture. According to Fried- 
 berger the assumption of a common "anaphyla- 
 toxin" is only apparently in contradiction to the 
 well-known law of specificity of the infectious dis- 
 eases. In the infectious diseases it is not the poison 
 
 1 This applies only to the infectious bacteria, not to those pro- 
 ducing extra-cellular toxins. 
 
158 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 which is specific, but only the mode of its produc- 
 tion. The production of anaphylatoxin requires the 
 action of antibodies; the mere solution or disinte- 
 gration of bacteria by other means does not suffice. 
 In other words, a definite cleavage of the proteid 
 molecule is necessary. The anaphylatoxin, there- 
 fore, is not identical with Pfeiffer's "endotoxins," 
 though perhaps the latter may be the mother sub- 
 stance from which the anaphylatoxin is derived. 
 
 Another important factor in pathogenesis, accord- 
 ing to Bail, is the ability of many bacteria to pro- 
 duce certain neutralizing substances, not directly 
 injurious, but able to inhibit or neutralize the anti- 
 bacterial activities of the body. These substances 
 Bail calls aggressins. There is still some doubt 
 whether they are a distinct class of bacterial 
 products. Wassermann and Citron, Doerr, and 
 others regard them as consisting of dissolved 
 bacterial substances, extracted endotoxins and 
 toxins. 
 
 Resistance Against Infection. The ability of 
 an animal to resist the effects of a pathogenic 
 organism is spoken of as immunity, and may be 
 either natural or acquired. For example, it is well 
 known that the lower animals are immune against 
 syphilis and gonorrhoea, that dogs and goats are 
 rarely affected with tuberculosis, and that man is 
 naturally immune against chicken cholera and 
 rinderpest. These are instances of natural im- 
 
INFECTION AND IMMUNITY 159 
 
 muiiity. Furthermore, it is well established that 
 with certain diseases one attack usually protects 
 the individual for life. This is well seen in 
 small-pox, scarlet fever, and measles. Inasmuch 
 as the individual was previously susceptible, 
 this form of immunity is spoken of as acquired 
 immunity. 
 
 Natural Immunity. It is seldom that natural 
 resistance is absolute. Young animals are often 
 susceptible to an infection against which adults are 
 resistant. Thus young pigeons are readily infected 
 with anthrax while older pigeons are usually 
 refractory. Moreover, the resistance of animals 
 toward infections against which they are relatively 
 immune can often be lowered by artificial means. 
 Frogs can be infected with anthrax if they are kept 
 in water at a temperature of 35 C. Conversely, 
 chickens, which also are relatively immune to 
 anthrax, can be infected if they are chilled. White 
 rats, which are ordinarily resistant to anthrax 
 infection, become susceptible after fatigue or when 
 fed on an exclusively vegetable diet. 
 
 Ehrlich believes that natural immunity is some- 
 times due to the absence, in the body of the invaded 
 animal, of suitable receptors for the virus. After 
 what has been said in connection with the side 
 chain theory, it is obvious that the virus cannot 
 exert its pathogenic action if there are no receptors 
 whereby it is anchored to the body cells. More- 
 
160 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 over, as Ehrlich points out, even if such receptors 
 are present, it is possible for the animal to be immune 
 provided the receptors are situated only in indif- 
 ferent, vitally unimportant tissues. In some of 
 the lower animals there is reason to believe that the 
 toxin of tetanus does combine with such tissue 
 (Metchnikoff). 
 
 Acquired Immunity, This may be either active 
 or passive, and either form may be acquired naturally 
 or artificially. As examples of naturally acquired 
 active immunity w r e may mention the immunity 
 developed by one attack of small-pox, scarlet 
 fever, etc. The immunity against small-pox con- 
 ferred by vaccination is an example of artificially 
 acquired active immunity; so is the preventive 
 inoculation with bacterial vaccine against typhoid 
 fever. The best illustration of artificially acquired 
 passive immunity is the injection of diphtheria 
 antitoxin into humans, while the transmission of 
 antitoxic immunity from mother to offspring is 
 an example of naturally acquired passive im- 
 munity. 
 
 So far as maternal transmission of immunity is 
 concerned, a number of writers, among whom may 
 be mentioned Ehrlich, 1 Anderson, 2 and Theobald 
 
 1 See Morgenroth's article in Kolle and Wasserman's Hand- 
 buch, Vol. iv, p. 784. 
 
 2 Anderson, Bull. Hyg. Lab. U. S. Pub. Health and Mar. 
 Hosp. Serv., No. 30. 
 
INFECTION AND IMMUNITY .16 1 
 
 Smith, 1 noted that an actively immunized female 
 parent may transmit antibodies to the immediate 
 young, who, receiving the immunity passively, soon 
 lose it again. The male parent is unable to trans- 
 mit any immunity. In his classical studies with 
 ricin and abrin, Ehrlich showed that lactation 
 played an important part in the transmission of 
 immunity from female mice to their immediate off- 
 spring. By immunizing a nursing mother mouse 
 (after the birth of the litter) he was able to demon- 
 strate the transmission of immunity to swine plague 
 to the nursing young. Smith, on the other hand, 
 in his experiments with guinea pigs, immunized 
 against diphtheria toxin, found that lactation played 
 no appreciable part in the passive immunity of the 
 young. Salge nursed infants with the milk of 
 goats which had been immunized against diphtheria 
 and against typhoid, and was unable to'demonstrate 
 the passage of antibodies to the infants. 
 
 In contrasting active with passive immunization 
 we may say that the former is usually more effect- 
 ive, more lasting, and productive of a general 
 immunity and not merely of one particular kind. 
 It is, however, sometimes difficult to carry out, 
 may involve some risk to the patient, and takes 
 time. Passive immunization, on the other hand, 
 is usually productive of only a limited kind of 
 immunity, i.e., antitoxic, bactericidal, opsonic, etc., 
 
 1 Smith, Jour. Exper. Med., Vol. xi, 1909. 
 
1 62 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 and therefore is often ineffective. Consisting, as 
 it usually does, in the injection of an alien serum, 
 passive immunization produces an immunity of but 
 short duration, the body apparently getting rid of 
 the alien proteid as rapidly as possible. The great 
 advantage of this form of immunization, however, 
 is its convenience, freedom from risk to the patient, 
 and above all, the fact that the immunity is pro- 
 duced instantaneously. 
 
 Mechanism of Immunity. Infection, whether 
 natural or artificial, is usually followed by a 
 remarkable series of alterations in the tissues of 
 the infected host. Representing, as it does, all the 
 tissues of the body, it is natural that these changes 
 are most strikingly exhibited in the blood. The 
 alterations vary, however, both with the kind 
 of bacterium, and with the animal species involved. 
 Against the true toxins, including probably the 
 leucocidins and hasmolysins, the body produces anti- 
 toxins; against the bacterial bodies it directs the 
 action of the leucocytes and the lytic combinations 
 formed by the union of amboceptor and comple- 
 ment; against the so-called aggressins it directs 
 the opsonins and perhaps also the bacteriolysins. 
 
 Before leaving the consideration of the reaction 
 of the body to infection, attention should be called 
 to the comprehensive investigations of Opie. This 
 observer showed that the cells which accumulate in 
 response to an irritant contain enzymes, the enzyme 
 of the polynuclear leucocytes resembling trypsin 
 
INFECTION AND IMMUNITY I 6 2 a 
 
 and the enzyme of the macrophages resembling 
 pepsin in its action. The blood serum, on the 
 other hand, contains an antienzyme. The varying 
 relation existing between these enzymes and the 
 antienzymes serves to explain how the same irritant 
 in the same quantity may cause two different types 
 of inflammation. This is well illustrated by the 
 following experiment made by Opie: 1 If a small 
 quantity of turpentine is injected into the sub- 
 cutaneous tissue of dog, a large fluctuating abscess 
 filled with creamy pus is formed within four days; 
 there is a widespread undermining of the skin. 
 The same quantity of turpentine injected into the 
 pleural cavity causes a serofibrinous inflammation 
 which undergoes resolution so that the pleural 
 cavity is restored to its normal condition after about 
 ten days; there is no destruction of tissue and a 
 scar is not formed. In the subcutaneous tissue 
 only a small amount of oedematous exudate can 
 accumulate; the undiluted irritant causes active 
 migration of leucocytes so that the antibody of the 
 exuded serum is soon overbalanced by the enzyme 
 set free by disintegrated pus cells. In the pleural 
 cavity, on the contrary, a large quantity of serum 
 quickly accumulates and the exudate is sero- 
 fibrinous instead of purulent; the antienzyme it 
 contains is capable of holding in check the enzyme 
 
 1 E. L. Opie, Lecture before the Harvey Society, New York, 
 Feb. 1910. The Harvey Lectures, J. B. Lippincott Co. 1910. 
 
l62b IMMUNE SERA 
 
 of the accumulated leucocytes. If a bit of the 
 fibrinous exudate is suspended in the exuded 
 serum, it is preserved intact. Nevertheless, by 
 repeated injection of turpentine at short intervals 
 into the pleural cavity, accumulation of leucocytes 
 can be prolonged so that finally a condition is 
 produced in which antienzyme can no longer 
 restrain the enzyme. The softened fibrin of such 
 an exudate quickly disintegrates in the serum of 
 the exudate. These observations, as Opie points 
 out, help to explain how the typhoid bacillus pro- 
 duces abscesses in certain situations such as the 
 kidney and bone; how the pneumococcus, which 
 rarely causes abscess of the lung, in which condi- 
 tions are somewhat similar to those within the pleural 
 cavity, may cause suppuration in other localities, 
 such as the middle ear, or in the subdural space, etc. 
 In addition to the antibodies already mentioned, 
 the animal body produces agglutinins and precip- 
 itins directed against the invading bacteria, but 
 the relation of these antibodies to immunity is not 
 at all clear. So far as the action of the agglutinins 
 is concerned, we have already pointed out (on page 
 36) that this appears to have no destructive effect 
 on the agglutinated organisms. Moreover, while ag- 
 glutination is often observed to precede lysis, there is 
 no reason to believe it a necessary factor in the lytic 
 process, nor even an aid thereto. Whether this list 
 exhausts the number of serum antibodies is doubtful. 
 
INFECTION AND IMMUNITY 163 
 
 The antibody content of the serum, ^wever, is 
 not always the same as that of the blood plasma. 
 Thus Gengou, by collecting the plasma in vaselined 
 tubes, found it often to be almost devoid of bac- 
 tericidal power, while the corresponding serum was 
 capable of destroying large numbers of microor- 
 ganisms. In these cases, it is evident, we cannot 
 regard plasma destruction of bacteria as the impor- 
 tant factor in immunity. Moreover, in the case of 
 bacteria containing considerable quantities of endo- 
 toxin, it is conceivable that plasma destruction of 
 bacteria may even do considerable harm by 
 causing an enormous liberation of endotoxin. This 
 point is perhaps of practical importance as contra- 
 indicating the use of bacteriolytic sera in the 
 curative treatment of certain infections. 
 
 From what has been said it is evident that the 
 exact mechanism of immunity, at least so far as 
 most infections are concerned, is still very obscure. 
 Like most biological phenomena, the deeper we 
 analyze the problem, the more complex and more 
 marvelous it becomes. Enough has, however, been 
 presented to show some of the difficulties to be 
 overcome and the method of attacking the sub- 
 ject. 
 
 Relation of Anaphylaxis to Immunity. We have 
 already discussed the relation of anaphylaxis to 
 infection and may now take up briefly its relation 
 to immunity. We know that the subcutaneous, 
 
164 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 intraperitoneal, or intravenous introduction of alien 
 proteid is followed by the formation of antibodies; 
 at the same time it can readily be shown that no 
 antibodies develop after the oral introduction of 
 milk, eggs, or even of raw meat. In other words, 
 there is a marked contrast in the behavior of the 
 body between the enteral and the parenteral intro- 
 duction of proteid. In the former the proteid is 
 acted on by the gastric and intestinal juices (pepsin, 
 trypsin, and enterokinase) . These so break down 
 the proteid molecule that it loses its species identity. 
 After this, absorption takes place, and with it there 
 is a synthesis, or rearrangement, of the molecule 
 whereby it is built up into the specific proteid of 
 the body. Under normal conditions it is im- 
 possible to produce specific antibodies by feeding 
 alien proteid. Precipitins have, however, been pro- 
 duced by overfeeding animals with large quantities 
 of alien blood. When proteid is introduced paren- 
 terally it gives rise to the formation of specific 
 antibodies, and thus to the state of anaphylaxis. 
 The term anaphylaxis is unfortunate, for the con- 
 dition is not always opposed to immunity. Von 
 Pirquet, it will be remembered, called attention to 
 the altered reactivity during the anaphy lactic state. 
 We must not lose sight of the fact that the symp- 
 toms of anaphylaxis are brought on when sensitized 
 animals are subsequently injected 'with relatively 
 large quantities of the same proteid. Following 
 
INFECTION AND IMMUNITY 165 
 
 such an injection there is a sudden liberation of 
 large amounts of toxic material. The parent eral 
 introduction of large quantities of alien proteid 
 must, however, be very exceptional under natural 
 conditions. The number of bacteria primarily 
 involved in an infection certainly represents but a 
 very small amount of alien proteid. If the body is 
 in the condition of allergy (anaphylaxis) at the 
 time of infection it will be able to respond more 
 quickly than otherwise and perhaps destroy the 
 invaders. Under these circumstances it is con- 
 ceivable that the condition is really an immunity 
 reaction. Looking at the entire question broadly 
 we may regard the mechanism which lies at the 
 bottom of the phenomenon of anaphylaxis as a 
 useful contrivance which enables the organism to 
 rid itself of alien proteid, both organized and un- 
 organized, which has been introduced parent erally. 
 Immunity Reaction on the Part of Bacteria. It 
 may be well at this point to call attention to a view 
 advanced by Welch some years ago. According to 
 this it is reasonable to suppose that just as the 
 animal body produces antibodies against an invad- 
 ing organism, so does the latter, owing to the action 
 of the body fluids, produce antibodies directed 
 against the tissues of the invaded body. In this 
 way the infecting organism would be adapting itself 
 to unfavorable surroundings, and this we know it 
 often does. It is certain that the animal body often 
 
1 66 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 successfully overcomes an infectious disease without 
 entirely overcoming the infecting bacteria. This is 
 well shown by what we call chronic germ carriers. 
 Deutsch regards the increase in virulence brought 
 about by successive passage of a bacterium through 
 a susceptible animal as representing an immunity 
 developed by the bacterium against the anti- 
 bacterial agencies of the body. 
 
 Atrepsy. Ehrlich has investigated this phe- 
 nomenon in the case of trypanosomes. He found 
 that a monkey which had been infected with a 
 particular strain of trypanosome and then cured 
 by means of chemo- therapeutic agents, when 
 tested with the original strain was not immune, 
 the disease reappearing after a long incubation. 
 If mice were inoculated with blood from the diseased 
 animal, i.e., with blood containing trypanosomes, 
 they became infected and died. Curiously, how- 
 ever, if the trypanosomes were first removed from 
 this monkey blood, it was found that the serum 
 was able to kill the original strain of trypanosomes. 
 This showed that the trypanosomes had undergone 
 some change in the body of the monkey; they 
 differed from the original strain in their behavior 
 toward the serum; they had become " serum-fast." 
 Similar observations were made at the same time 
 by Kleine, and recently also by Mesnil. 
 
 In explanation of this adaptation, Ehrlich sug- 
 gests that certain particular receptors of the para- 
 
INFECTION AND IMMUNITY i6f 
 
 site are concerned entirely with the parasite's nutri- 
 tion. Owing to the destruction brought about by 
 the chemical agent, some of these receptors pass 
 into the monkey's body, and, acting as antigens, 
 excite the production of antibodies directed against 
 these particular receptors. When living parasites 
 are brought into contact with this antibody, either 
 in vitro or in vivo, the antibody is anchored by 
 the parasites. As a result of this occupation of 
 its receptors, the parasite undergoes a biological 
 alteration which consists in the disappearance of 
 the original receptor group and its replacement 
 by a new group. Ehrlich's researches lead him to 
 believe that the antibody has merely an anti- 
 nutritive action, blocking the nutrireceptor of the 
 parasite and so bringing about starvation. The 
 parasite thus develops immunity by getting rid 
 of certain of its nutrireceptors, and replacing them 
 with different ones. This form of immunity Ehrlich 
 speaks of as " atrepsy," while the antibodies de- 
 veloped against the nutrireceptors he terms " atrep- 
 sins." A somewhat different example of atrepsy 
 is the following: Bird-pox, virulent for both fowl 
 and pigeon, if passed through the pigeon becomas 
 completely avirulent for the fowl. Ehrlich believes 
 that the parasite in passing through the pigeon has 
 to assimilate substances different from those assim- 
 ilated in its passage through the fowl. There- 
 fore that part of the receptors which deals with the 
 
1 68 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 nutritive substances in the fowl's organism is not 
 in use during the passage through the pigeon and 
 may become atrophied, so that on the parasite 
 being transferred back to the fowl, supposing one 
 of the specific constituents of fowls to be neces- 
 sary for its proliferation, it would no more be 
 able to grow. We have, therefore, a loss of cer- 
 tain receptors which are absolutely necessary for 
 nutrition. 
 
 Ehrlich suggests that probably the majority of 
 so-called non-pathogenic micro-organisms, if intro- 
 duced into an animal's body, perish by this mechan- 
 ism. It is not necessary to assume the presence 
 of special poisons in the body, it suffices to suppose 
 that the bacteria in question do not find the needful 
 means of existence in the body and therefore cannot 
 multiply. They thus fall a prey to the phagocytes 
 which destroy the invaders in a non-specific 
 manner. 
 
X. BACTERIAL VACCINES 
 
 Historical. Early in the eighteenth century 
 attention was called to the fact that in Oriental 
 countries individuals were immunized against small- 
 pox by inoculating them with a little small-pox 
 virus under the skin. In 1796 Jenner showed that 
 similar immunity could be produced by inoculating 
 the virus of cow-pox, and this procedure was free 
 from the dangers that attended small-pox inocu- 
 lations. Following the discovery of the specific 
 microbe of anthrax, attention was directed to the 
 problem of combating this disease. Pasteur, who 
 had been greatly impressed with Jenner's work 
 with cow-pox, felt that attempts should be made 
 to produce a mild attack of the disease, and that 
 this would then protect against a virulent infection. 
 After considerable experimental labor he devised 
 the plan of inoculating animals with cultures of 
 anthrax which had been attenuated by being grown 
 at high temperatures, 43 C. These animals had 
 a mild attack of the disease from which they soon 
 recovered, and then were resistant to infection with 
 
 virulent virus. Soon after this, inspired by Pas- 
 
 169 
 
1 70 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 teur's work, successful vaccines * were prepared 
 against chicken cholera and swine plague. 
 
 The discovery of diphtheria antitoxin in 1893 by 
 v. Behring marked the beginning of the search for 
 specific sera, and it was not long before a number 
 of such were produced and employed clinically. 
 The use of sera for therapeutic purposes was very 
 attractive, because it was possible to have some 
 animal, like the horse, manufacture the antibodies, 
 and one needed then merely to transfer the animal's 
 immunity to the patient by injecting some of the 
 animal's serum. Clinical trials, however, soon 
 showed that most of these sera had little thera- 
 peutic value, and subsequently laboratory experi- 
 ments disclosed a large number of difficulties in 
 their practical application. After what has been 
 said under haemolysins and bacteriolysins it will 
 be unnecessary to dwell on these difficulties. Among 
 them is the problem of providing sufficient com- 
 plement, the determination of the optimum dose 
 so as to avoid the parodoxical results known as 
 the Neisser-Wechsberg phenomenon, the ability 
 of producing really effective antibodies, and finally 
 the question whether immunity in a given case is 
 really directly due to the presence of these anti- 
 bodies in the serum. 
 
 1 The French have long used the term "vaccin" to denote 
 any virus which is used for immunization, and that is the 
 sense in which the term is used here. There is, of course, 
 nothing of the cow, vacca, about them. 
 
BACTERIAL VACCINES 171 
 
 In the past few years it has become more and 
 more apparent that the limitations of serum therapy, 
 at least in the great majority of infectious diseases, 
 are at present almost insuperable. Attention was 
 therefore again turned to treatment by active 
 immunization. It was perhaps only natural, in 
 view of his discoveries in fermentation, that Pasteur 
 should have believed that the production of immu- 
 nity required the action of the living virus. He 
 therefore vigorously combated the idea that im- 
 munity could be brought about by means of dead 
 virus, or of lifeless products of growth of the virus. 
 Touissant, as far back as 1880, had held out for 
 the latter possibility, but the imperfections of 
 his technique were such that his views were not 
 accepted. To Salmon and Smith of this country 
 belongs the honor of first clearly demonstrating 
 the possibility of immunization w r ith dead cul- 
 tures. 
 
 Methods of Active Immunization. Active im- 
 munization can be carried out in several ways: 
 
 (i) By means of living cultures of the virus. 
 Usually the cultures are attenuated, but there are 
 some exceptions. 
 
 A number of different procedures may be employed 
 to attenuate the virus. Thus, by drying, as is done 
 with rabies virus in the Pasteur treatment; or by 
 growing the virus at a temperature unsuited for the 
 development of virulence, as is done in the case of 
 
172 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 anthrax; or by passing the virus through a less sus- 
 ceptible animal, as is done in vaccination against small- 
 pox; or by means of chemicals such as the addition 
 of iodine solution to diphtheria toxin, as was formerly 
 done by Behring; or by means of heat, as was also 
 formerly done with diphtheria toxin. 
 
 (2) By means of dead cultures of the virus. The 
 cultures can be killed either by heat or by the use 
 of chemicals. 
 
 (3) By the so-called " combined method," i.e., 
 by first administering a dose of the specific immune 
 serum and subsequently the virus. This method 
 has been used in typhoid fever, cholera, and plague. 
 
 (4) By means of the products of autolysis of the 
 cultures. This has also been used in typhoid fever, 
 and seems to possess certain advantages over the 
 use of native cultures. 
 
 (5) By means of various combinations of the 
 preceding methods. 
 
 The choice of these various methods of immuni- 
 zation depends on the nature of the infecting virus. 
 With some infections dead cultures apparently are 
 able to cause the production of full protective pow- 
 ers, while in other infections the body seems to 
 require a greater stimulus. In these, the use of 
 attenuated living cultures may bring about the 
 desired immunity. Finally there are infections 
 in which nothing short of fully virulent cultures 
 seems to bring about the development of sufficient 
 
BACTERIAL VACCINES 173 
 
 immunity. In these cases it is necessary to first 
 prepare the way by the use of dead or of attenuated 
 cultures. 
 
 Treatment with Vaccines. The treatment of 
 infections by means of active immunization has 
 been greatly stimulated by the work of Wright, 
 who has published favorable results in a large 
 number of infections. Already several hundred 
 thousand persons have been actively immunized 
 against cholera, and large bodies of troops have 
 been immunized against typhoid fever. Until 
 recently the method found application particu- 
 larly in the prophylactic immunization of persons 
 liable to be exposed to infection. At the present 
 time, however, owing largely to the efforts of 
 Wright, the method has come to be used for cura- 
 tive purposes, i.e., for infections already in progress. 
 This author has clearly formulated the conditions 
 in which he thinks this form of treatment is indi- 
 cated, and he has also devised methods for the 
 more exact determination of doses than were 
 formerly in use. 
 
 In the employment of bacterial vaccines, one 
 must constantly keep in mind the nature of the 
 bacterium with which one is working, and the kind 
 of immunity one wishes to bring about. Every- 
 thing depends on the way in which the vaccine is 
 prepared. With bacteria making considerable 
 quantities of a toxin, it will be necessary, if we 
 
174 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 wish to immunize against this toxin, to grow the 
 culture for the requisite length of time and under 
 the proper conditions for producing the toxin. 
 In the case of bacteria possessing certain endo- 
 toxins, it may be necessary to let the cultures 
 autolyze, so as to set these substances free, or the 
 bacteria may be crushed and ground for the same 
 purpose. On the other hand, we may wish to use 
 these bacteria for producing a specific agglutinat- 
 ing serum. In that case we often try to avoid 
 injecting these toxic substances. Our entire pro- 
 cedure might then have to be quite the reverse of 
 what has just been indicated. 
 
 The Vaccines. Wright's method of preparing a 
 staphylococcus, typhoid, streptococcus, or gono- 
 coccus vaccine, is as follows: 
 
 Several streak slant agar cultures are planted and 
 incubated for twenty to twenty-four hours. The 
 cultures are then washed off with normal salt solu- 
 tion, using from one to several cc. for each culture. 
 These suspensions are next heated to 55 C. in 
 order to kill the bacteria, and are then standard- 
 ized. By this is meant determining the number of 
 organisms per cc., for Wright always used definite 
 numbers of bacteria in his inoculations. This 
 standardization is readily accomplished by means 
 of the method devised by Wright, which is as fol- 
 lows : From a finger prick a drop of blood is sucked 
 up in a capillary tube to a mark made at any con- 
 
BACTERIAL VACCINES 175 
 
 venient point with a wax pencil. Next an equal 
 amount of the bacterial suspension is drawn into 
 the tube, allowing a tiny air-bubble to intervene. 
 The two fluids are then expelled on a glass slide, 
 and thoroughly mixed by sucking back and forth 
 a number of times. After this has been done the 
 mixture is spread in the ordinary way of making 
 blood smears. If these blood smears, after stain- 
 ing, are examined with a microscope having a ruled 
 eye-piece, it is a simple matter to determine the 
 ratio of bacteria to blood cells. Taking the red 
 blood cells as 5,000 million per cc., one calculates 
 the number of bacteria per cc. In practice it is 
 advisable to so dilute the bacterial suspension that 
 the dose to be injected is contained in about one 
 cc. of fluid. Finally \ per cent, of carbolic acid 
 is added as a preservative. Such a suspension is a 
 " bacterial vaccine." It goes without saying that 
 the vaccines should be tested by means of cultures 
 to insure sterility, and that contaminations should 
 be excluded by means of microscopical exami- 
 nation. 
 
 Doses. So far as doses are concerned, these vary 
 with different bacteria, and also according to the 
 indications, opsonic or clinical. The ordinary dose 
 for the staphylococcus vaccine is from 200,000,000 
 to 1,000,000,000 organisms; for the streptococcus 
 it is from 50 to 75 or 100,000,000, and for typhoid 
 from 750,000,000 to 1,000,000,000 bacteria. All 
 
T y6 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 the injections are given subcutaneously, and it is 
 well to repeat the injections every three or four 
 days. 
 
 Results. The clinical results obtained by means 
 of bacterial vaccines have varied. There seems 
 considerable agreement on the part of most observers 
 that certain localized infections, such as acne, mul- 
 tiple boils, etc., usually respond remarkably well 
 with this method of treatment. In the treatment of 
 bone tuberculosis the results are not so harmonious, 
 and in the treatment of general infections many 
 failures have been reported. There is no doubt, 
 however, that treatment by means of bacterial 
 vaccines is a valuable addition to our therapeutic 
 armamentarium . 
 
XL LEUCOCYTE EXTRACTS IN THE TREAT- 
 MENT OF INFECTIONS 
 
 Theory. Attention has already been called to 
 Hiss's view concerning the role of leucocytes in 
 combating infections. Believing that the phagocytic 
 power of leucocytes of persons suffering from infec- 
 tions to be less than that of leucocytes of the normal 
 individual, Hiss was led to extract these cells with 
 a view to utilizing their neutralizing and other pro- 
 tective substances in readily diffusible form. By 
 this means it was thought possible to furnish to the 
 infected organism such assistance as would enable 
 its phagocytic cells to properly protect the various 
 tissues from poisons elaborated from the invading 
 bacteria. 
 
 Preparation of the Extracts. In the preparation of 
 the extract, double pleural inoculations of aleuronat l 
 suspensions are made into rabbits. After 24 hours 
 the rabbits are killed and the turbid fluid collected 
 from both pleural cavities. The quantity obtained 
 varies from about 30 to 60 cc. The fluid is quickly 
 centrifuged and the serum decanted. The cells are 
 
 1 Aleuronat, a vegetable product similar to gluten, is pre- 
 pared by Hundhausen, in Hamm, Westphalia, Germany, and 
 is supplied in packages containing 100 grams. The suspensions 
 are prepared with thin starch paste and boiled. 
 
 177 
 
1 78 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 then thoroughly emulsified in distilled water, using 
 about as much water as the volume of serum orig- 
 inally poured off, and the mixtures allowed to 
 stand for a few hours at 37 C. This more or less 
 autolyzed fluid is used for the injections, and the 
 dose employed varies from 5 to 15 cc., repeated 
 several times. 
 
 Application and Results. In their work, clinical 
 and experimental, Hiss and Zinsser 1 thought they 
 saw little indication of immediate bactericidal 
 power possessed by the leucocyte extract, but that 
 the results pointed rather to a marked power on 
 the part of the extract to reduce the purely tox- 
 semic manifestations in infected subjects. Favorable 
 clinical results have been reported by these authors 
 in cerebrospinal meningitis, lobar pneumonia, 2 and 
 other infections, and while the data are still too 
 scanty to justify definite conclusions as to the 
 value of this treatment, enough has been done to 
 warrant further careful clinical investigations along 
 this line. 
 
 1 Hiss and Zinsser, Journal Med. Research, Vol. xix, Nov., 
 1908. 
 
 2 See also Floyd and Lucas, Journ. Med. Research, VoL 
 xxi, Sept., 1909. 
 
XII. THE PRINCIPLES UNDERLYING THE 
 
 TREATMENT OF SYPHILIS WITH 
 
 SALVARSAN (" 606 ") 
 
 As a result of some of his earliest researches and 
 in entire accordance with his views as already set 
 forth under "Antitoxins," Ehrlich has always held 
 that the action of a chemical substance on a given 
 cell denotes the existence of definite chemical affini- 
 ties between the substance and the cell. Applying 
 this conception to the germicidal action of chem- 
 icals, he maintains that the latter must have a 
 certain chemical affinity for the parasites in order 
 to kill them. Substances having such affinities 
 he terms " parasitotropic." It is clear, however, 
 that substances which can destroy parasites will 
 also be poisonous for the animal body, i.e., they 
 will have chemical affinity for the vital organs of 
 the host. They are, therefore, also " organotropic." 
 In the employment of chemical substances in com- 
 bating infectious diseases it follows that success 
 can only be attained if their chemical affinity for 
 the infecting parasite bears certain relations to their 
 
 affinity for the infected body. 
 
 179 
 
i8o IMMUNE SERA 
 
 In his researches on trypanosomes Ehrlich found 
 that if the dose of germicide administered to an 
 infected animal was too small to kill all the para- 
 sites, there developed after a time a strain of organ- 
 isms which were resistant to the further action of 
 the germicide. It was usually futile to repeat the 
 dose, for the resistant parasites would survive. 
 At the same time the interesting observation was 
 made that this resistance manifested itself only 
 in the animal body; in vitro the parasites could 
 still be filled by the germicide in question. It was 
 also found that the various chemical substances 
 which exerted therapeutic effects in animals infected 
 with trypanosomes could be grouped into three 
 classes, namely i, various arsenicals (arsenious 
 acid, atoxyl, arsacetin, arsenophenylglycin, and 
 finally "606,"); 2, certain azo dyes (among them 
 trypan red, trypan blue, and trypan violet) ; and 3, 
 certain basic triphenylmethane dyes (among them 
 parafuchsine, methyl violet, pyronine, etc.). Against 
 each of these classes it was possible to produce speci- 
 fically resistant strains of trypanosomes, so that a 
 strain which had been made resistant to fuchsin was 
 also resistant to related basic dyes, but vulnerable 
 to the azo dye and to the arsenicals. Moreover, 
 by appropriate treatment it was found possible 
 to produce strains resistant against all three classes 
 of trypanocidal agents. 
 
 According to Ehrlich the union of the chemical 
 
TREATMENT OF SYPHILIS WITH SALVARSAN 181 
 
 with the parasites is brought about by certain 
 " chemoreceptors " of the parasites. The arsenic 
 compounds, for example, are anchored by arseno- 
 receptors. When a strain therefore becomes re- 
 sistant to the arsenicals one might suppose that 
 this was due to the parasite ridding itself of its 
 arseno-receptors ; similarly also with the other 
 classes of trypanocidal substances. But this appears 
 not to be the case, for, as we have already said, the 
 resistance is manifested only in the animal body, 
 and not in vitro. Ehrlich explains this by assuming 
 that in the resistant strain the affinity of that par- 
 ticular chemo-receptor has been reduced, so that 
 when the germicidal agent is introduced into an 
 animal infected with the resistant strain, the pro- 
 portion of distribution of the germicide is altered 
 in favor of the chemo-receptors of the organism. 
 In other words the organotropic affinity is greater 
 than the parasitotropic affinity. Had the parasite's 
 chemo-receptors quite disappeared there should 
 have been no difference in the resistance as mani- 
 fested in the animal and in vitro. 
 
 In searching for germicidal substances whose 
 parasitotropic affinity should be great in comparison 
 to their organotropic affinity, Ehrlich made careful 
 pharmacological studies with each of the three 
 classes of trypanocidal substances already mentioned. 
 After testing homologues and substitution products 
 of almost every variety he finally concluded that 
 
ig2 IMMUNE SERA 
 
 dioxydiamidoarsenobenzol fulfilled the require- 
 ments. As each of the substances was tested it 
 received a laboratory number for identification; 
 dioxydiamidoarsenobenzol bore the serial number 
 606, whence the designation by which this substance 
 is still commonly known. Its trade name is " Sal- 
 varsan." 
 
 It is not our purpose, in these pages, to enter into 
 the chemistry of " 606," or to discuss the treatment 
 of syphilis by this drug. Suffice it to say that 
 Ehrlich lays considerable stress on the fact that 
 in 606 the arsenic is in the trivalent unsaturated 
 form. Pentavalent arsenic compounds, he believes, 
 are less efficient in their trypanocidal action. As 
 supplied in the market, Salvarsan is a bright yellow 
 powder containing theoretically 34.15 per cent 
 arsenic. It is the hydrochloride of dioxydiami- 
 doarsenobenzol, and is administered by suspending 
 or dissolving it in water with the addition of NaOH 
 to neutralize, thus forming dioxydiamidoarseno- 
 benzol plus NaCl and H 2 O. Subcutaneous, intra- 
 muscular, and intravenous injections have been 
 employed, as also solutions and suspensions of the 
 drug. The results in the treatment of syphilis 
 have been encouraging, but the time has not yet 
 come to express a definite opinion concerning the 
 ultimate value of this drug. 
 
 The principles here outlined, however, deserve 
 to be carefully studied and tested experimentally, 
 
TREATMENT OF SYPHILIS WITH SALVARSAN 183 
 
 for if correct they point the way for devising an 
 effective therapy for many infections at present 
 quite beyond our control. 
 
 LITERATURE 
 
 EHRLICH-BOLDUAN. Collected Studies in Immunity, 
 (Chapter XXXIV) 1910. Wiley & Sons, New 
 York. 
 
 EHRLICH. Experimental Researches on Specific Thera- 
 peutics. 1909. Hoeber, New York. 
 
 EHRLICH and HATA. Die Experimented Chemothera- 
 pie der Spirillosen. 1910. Springer, Berlin. 
 
 MARTINDALE and WESTCOTT. " Salvarsan " (" 606 "). 
 1911. Hoeber, New York. 
 
 WECHSELMANN. The Treatment of Syphilis with Di- 
 oxydiamidoarsenobenzol. (English translation by 
 A. L. Wolbarst). 1911. Rebman Company, New 
 York. 
 
APPENDIX A 
 
 THE WASSERMANN TEST FOR SYPHILIS. 
 
 As has already been pointed out on page 72, 
 Wassermann applied the principle of the Bordet- 
 Gengou phenomenon to the detection of syphilis 
 antibodies in the serum and cerebrospinal fluid of 
 persons infected with syphilis. In the few years 
 which have elapsed since Wassermann's first pub- 
 lication, the reliability of this method of diagnos- 
 ing syphilis has been confirmed by a large number 
 of investigators, and it has already proven of con- 
 siderable value in several departments of medicine. 
 In response to numerous requests, the writer has 
 undertaken to give a clear description of the test, 
 together with a brief review of the results thus far 
 achieved by its use. 
 
 When an animal is repeatedly injected with red 
 blood cells of another species, it reacts to such in- 
 jections by producing substances in its serum which 
 have the power to dissolve these foreign blood cells. 
 Examined by means of a test tube experiment, it 
 is found that the serum exerts this power only 
 while it is fresh. Serum several days old is unable 
 to dissolve the recj cells. The fresh serum also 
 
 '85 
 
l86 APPENDIX 
 
 loses its solvent power by exposure to heat, say to 
 55 C. Investigations showed that the solvent 
 action could be restored to these sera by the addi- 
 tion of small quantities of a fresh normal serum, 
 i.e. of a serum which by itself had no solvent power 
 whatever. The inactive serum had thus been 
 reactivated. The original specific dissolving serum 
 therefore contained two substances, one of which 
 is very labile and the other stable. The stable 
 substance is specific for the blood cells against 
 which it is directed, i.e. against the cells used for 
 immunizing the animal. It is called the " immune 
 body," or the " amboceptor." The labile sub- 
 stance, as we have seen, is present in all fresh sera, 
 and is spoken of as the " complement." The action 
 of the immune body seems to consist in bringing 
 the solvent action of the complement to bear on 
 the given cells. We must conceive that the com- 
 plement possesses the solvent power, but has no 
 way of laying hold of the cell to be dissolved. The 
 immune body merely effects this combination. 
 Ehrlich's diagram on page 66 will serve to make 
 this conception clear. 
 
 All that has been said regarding immune bodies 
 and complement for the solution of blood cells, 
 holds for the substances which effect destruction of 
 bacteria when bacteria are used for immunization. 
 In fact, the process is the same, no matter what 
 cells are injected into the animal. The immune 
 body is always directed specifically against the 
 cells injected, and against no others. 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 As can be seen from Ehrlich's diagrams, the 
 bacteria or blood cells combine directly only with 
 the immune body. The complement, as already 
 said, has no way of laying hold of the cells. As 
 soon as the bacteria or cells have anchored the 
 immune body, however, conditions change. The 
 combination at once attracts and unites with the 
 complement. If the amount of complement is not 
 too large, the combination may unite with all of it, 
 i.e. may abstract the complement from the serum. 
 
 Just let us examine this by means of an illustra- 
 tion: Let us suppose we have immunized an ani- 
 mal with typhoid bacilli, and have obtained a 
 specific serum directed against these bacilli. This 
 serum has been inactivated by heating it to 55 C., 
 so that now it will act on typhoid bacilli only when 
 some fresh normal serum is added to complement 
 the immune body. For this purpose we have 
 provided ourselves with some freshly drawn serum 
 from a guinea pig. The guinea pig serum, there- 
 fore, is the "complement." On mixing typhoid 
 bacilli with the specific immune serum and then 
 with the complement, these three factors enter into 
 combination, and this results in the destruction of 
 the typhoid bacilli. The quantities can easily be 
 so arranged that this combination uses up all of the 
 complement, so that the fluid contains not a trace 
 of free complement after the substances have com- 
 bined. 
 
 Suppose, now, that we also had a specific serum 
 obtained by injecting an animal with red blood 
 
188 APPENDIX 
 
 cells, for example, by injecting a rabbit with sheep 
 blood cells. This rabbit serum would then be 
 specifically directed against sheep blood cells. Let 
 us inactivate this serum, by heating it to 55 C., so 
 that now it requires the addition of a fresh normal 
 serum to exert its solvent effect. For this purpose 
 we can again use fresh, normal guinea-pig serum. 
 When, then, we mix sheep blood cells with our 
 specific immune serum (against sheep blood cells) 
 and with the complement, i.e., with fresh normal 
 guinea-pig serum, all three factors unite, and bring 
 about destruction of the red blood cells. This is 
 manifested by the blood cells dissolving and 
 giving off their haemoglobin to the rest of the 
 fluid. 
 
 Let us now suppose we have carried out the first 
 part of this experiment, that with the typhoid bacilli, 
 and have left typhoid bacilli, specific typhoid serum 
 and complement in contact for several hours in a 
 warm place in order to cause the three factors to 
 combine. At the end of this time let us add sheep 
 blood cells and the specific serum directed against 
 sheep cells, but let us add no further complement, 
 because the fresh guinea-pig serum was able, as we 
 saw, to serve as as complement also for the blood 
 combination. The mixture is again placed in a 
 warm place for several hours, and then for twenty- 
 four hours in the refrigerator, after which it is ex- 
 amined. We shall find that no haemolysis has 
 occurred, from which we conclude that the previous 
 combination (typhoid bacilli, immune serum and 
 
APPENDIX 189 
 
 complement), had used up all the complement, and 
 left none for the blood combination. 
 
 If we were to repeat the whole experiment, but 
 leave out, in the first part of the test, say the spe- 
 cific typhoid serum, we should find that the- blood 
 cells would be dissolved. This is readily under- 
 stood when it is remembered that then we would 
 have only typhoid bacilli and complement, two 
 factors which cannot ccmbine directly. The com- 
 plement would therefore be left free to act in the 
 blood combination. 
 
 If hasmolysis occurs we may therefore conclude 
 that one of the factors in the first combination was 
 absent, and conversely, if hasmolysis does not occur, 
 we know that the first combination must have 
 been perfect, i.e. all three factors must have been 
 present. 
 
 It is at once apparent that in adapting this test 
 to the detection of syphilis antibodies, pure cultures 
 of the causative organism, i.e. of the "antigen," 
 were not available. Wassermann therefore made 
 use of extracts of syphilitic organs rich in spiro- 
 chastes in place of the typhoid bacilli, and used 
 either the serum or the cerebrospinal fluid of the 
 suspected case in place of the typhoid antiserum. 
 The rest of the test was similar to that described 
 above. When haemolysis of the sheep cells occured, 
 Wassermann said it showed that the first combina- 
 tion was incomplete; when haemolysis was com- 
 pletely inhibited, it showed, he said, that the first 
 combination was perfect, i.e. that the serum or 
 
190 APPENDIX 
 
 spinal fluid contained syphilis antibody. As in 
 most such tests, only a positive result determines ; 
 a negative result does not necessarily exclude the 
 presence of syphilitic infection. 
 
 While the above exposition will serve to fix the 
 general plan of the test in the mind of the reader, 
 we must at once say that the mode of action is not 
 as simple as Wassermann first believed. Before 
 going into this phase of the subject, it will be 
 advisable to present a description of the technique 
 of the test. 
 
 For carrying out the test the following materials 
 are required: 
 
 (i)" Antigen," i.e. fluid containing syphilis ma- 
 terial. This is comparable to the pure culture of 
 typhoid in the test described above. 
 
 (2) Serum or cerebrospinal fluid from the patient 
 to be examined. 
 
 (3) Sheep blood cells. 
 
 (4) Haemolytic antibody, i.e. inactivated serum 
 of a rabbit immunized against sheep blood cells. 
 
 (5) Complement, i.e. fresh normal serum from a 
 guinea-pig. 
 
 For the syphilis antigen it is best to use the 
 organs of a syphilitic foetus, i.e. one dead of heredi- 
 tary syphilis, as these tissues are particularly rich 
 in spirochaetes. The organs are chopped up and 
 macerated in a clean vessel in a mixture composed 
 of water, 1000; NaCl, 8.5; carbolic acid, 5.0; one 
 part of the tissue to four of the fluid. The mixture 
 is shaken in a shaking apparatus for twenty hours ; 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 the supernatant fluid poured off and centrifuged so 
 as to be perfectly clear.* 
 
 The serum for the test is collected from the 
 patient in the usual way by drawing from 5 to 
 10 cc. of blood from a vein at the elbow, placing 
 the blood in a sterile test tube and allowing it to 
 clot. Cerebrospinal fluid, obtained by lumbar 
 puncture, is preserved with 0.5% carbolic acid, and 
 then strongly centrifuged so as to make it perfectly 
 clear. 
 
 The sheep blood cells are obtained by defibrinat- 
 ing sheep blood, centrifuging and washing the blood 
 cells repeatedly with normal salt solution to remove 
 traces of adherent serum. A 5% suspension in salt 
 solution is used. 
 
 The haemolytic antibody consists of the serum of 
 a highly immunized (against sheep blood cells) 
 rabbit, the serum being inactivated by heating to 
 56 C. In the tests cited by Wassermann, one cc. 
 of a 1/1500 dilution of serum dissolved one cc. of 
 5% suspension of sheep blood cells at 37 C. in 
 two hours. 
 
 The complement consists of freshly drawn guinea- 
 pig serum. The test is carried out as follows : 
 
 To constant quantities of spinal fluid (e.g. i cc. 
 of the i/io dilution) decreasing amounts of the 
 extract of organs are added, thus 0.2, o.i, 0.05 cc. 
 Then i cc. of a i/io dilution of fresh normal guinea- 
 
 * In a very recent article, Wassermann states that more uni- 
 formly active extracts can be obtained by using 96% alcohol in 
 place of the water in the above formula. 
 
1.9 2 APPENDIX 
 
 pig serum is added, and the mixtures allowed to 
 remain in contact at 37 C. for one hour in order to 
 bind the complement. 
 
 In this mixture we have antigen; we may or may 
 not have antibody; we have complement. 
 
 If the antibody is present, the complement will 
 be anchored by the combination, and so be unavail- 
 able for the haemolytic test next in order. If no 
 antibody is present, the complement will still be 
 free to act in the haemolytic test. 
 
 At the end of the hour, we add to the above 
 mixtures: one cc. of a 5% suspension of sheep 
 blood cells, and one cc. of the amboceptor dilution 
 containing double the solvent dose for that amount 
 of sheep blood cells. Thus, if the titer of the 
 haemolytic serum is 1/1800, we take one cc. of a 
 dilution 1/900. 
 
 All the tubes are made up to the same volume 
 with normal salt solution, namely, to 5 cc.,and are 
 then placed in the incubator at 37 C. and kept 
 there for two hours. Then they are placed on ice 
 until the next day, when the results are noted- 
 The whole procedure is clearly shown by the pro- 
 tocol from Wassermann and Plaut reproduced on 
 page 193. 
 
 Few experiments in immunity require such care- 
 ful technique, or are open to so many sources of 
 error as this serum test for syphilis. In view, 
 too, of the enormous responsibility assumed in 
 making a positive diagnosis of syphilis, it is appa- 
 rent that the test should only be undertaken by 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 193 
 
 
 J 
 
 
 Haemoly- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 tic Ambo- 
 
 
 
 Syphilit. 
 Foetus 
 Extract. 
 (0.2 gm.) 
 One c.c. 
 of I Dilu- 
 tion. 
 
 Spinal Fluid 
 of Patient 
 M. 0.2, i.e.. 
 One c.c. of 
 the Dilu- 
 tion. 
 
 Normal 
 Guinea- 
 pig Serum 
 
 O.I CC., 
 
 i.e. i cc. 
 of a A 
 Dilution. 
 
 ceptor 
 
 I CC. 
 
 equals 
 Double 
 the 
 Solvent 
 dose for 
 
 Sheep 
 Blood 
 Cells i cc. 
 of a 5% 
 Suspen- 
 sion. 
 
 Results. 
 
 
 
 
 i cc. of a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5% Sus- 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 pension. 
 
 
 
 0.2 
 
 0.2 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 i .0 
 
 Complete inhibition 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 of haemolysis 
 
 O.I 
 
 0.2 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 Compl. inhibition 
 
 0.2 
 
 0. I 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 i .0 
 
 Marked inhibition 
 
 O.I 
 
 O. I 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 Marked inhibition 
 
 0.2 
 
 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 Complete solution 
 
 O.I 
 
 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 Complete solution 
 
 
 
 0.2 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 i .0 
 
 Complete solution 
 
 
 
 O.I 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 Complete solution 
 
 
 Spinal Fluid 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 of 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Non-syphil. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Person. 
 
 
 
 
 
 0.2 
 
 0. 2 
 
 1 .0 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 Complete solution 
 
 0. I 
 
 0. 2 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 Complete solution 
 
 O. 2 
 
 0. I 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 Complete solution 
 
 O.I 
 
 O.I 
 
 1 .0 
 
 1 .0 
 
 I.O 
 
 Complete solution 
 
 
 
 0.2 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 Complete solution 
 
 
 O. I 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 I.O 
 
 Complete solution 
 
 highly trained laboratory workers. On the other 
 hand, most who have busied themselves with the 
 test agree that suitable controls always lead to a 
 detection of possible sources of error, and that 
 
IQ4 APPENDIX 
 
 therefore the reaction, when properly performed, 
 can be relied upon. 
 
 When the test was first published Wassermann 
 regarded the reaction which occurred as one between 
 mutually specific bodies, i.e. between antigen and 
 antibody, the resulting combination having the 
 power to anchor the complement. Through the 
 work of Marie and Levaditi, of Landsteiner, Miiller 
 and Potzl, of Weil and Braun, and still other in- 
 vestigators, it soon became apparent that the test 
 could also be carried out by using extracts of non- 
 syphilitic tissue, i.e. of other pathological tissue or 
 normal tissue. That, of course, meant that the 
 view of a reciprocal specific relation between anti- 
 body and organ extract, in the sense that typhoid 
 antibody and typhoid bacilli are reciprocally re- 
 lated, had to be abandoned. This does not, how- 
 ever, effect the reliability of the reaction for diag- 
 nostic purposes, for it has been found that positive 
 results are still only obtained when the serum or 
 spinal fluid is of syphilitic origin.* 
 
 Working under Wassermann's direction, Forges 
 and Meier studied the nature of the substances 
 concerned in the reaction, and began by precipi- 
 tating the organ extracts with alcohol and testing 
 
 *It may be well to state that according to Landsteiner, Muller 
 and Potzl the serum of animals infected with dourine (trypanoso- 
 miasis) also gives rise to inhibition of haemolysis when tested 
 according to the above method. This has been confirmed by 
 Hartoch and Yakimoff. Whether this will affect the value of the 
 Wassermann test in humans can only be decided by further 
 clinical tests, especially in cases of human trypanosomiasis. 
 
APPENDIX 195 
 
 the resulting precipitate and clear fluid separately. 
 It was found that the substance concerned in the 
 reaction was soluble in alcohol, and the authors 
 thereupon made alcoholic extracts of the syphilitic 
 organs. These worked satisfactorily in making the 
 test. It was natural to think that the substance 
 which effected the reaction might be related to the 
 lipoids, and so the authors next studied the be- 
 havior of alcoholic extracts of normal human and 
 animal organs. While these extracts also sufficed 
 to produce the reaction, the authors felt that they 
 were not as active as extracts from syphilitic 
 organs. After it had been found that alcoholic ex- 
 tracts could be used for the test, a number of 
 authors almost simultaneously published favorable 
 results with chemically defined substances. Forges 
 and Meier used lecithin, Levaditi glycocholate of 
 soda, Sachs and Altmann oleate of soda, and 
 Fleischmann even used vaseline. The last-named 
 also used cholesterin with favorable results, but 
 Forges and Meier obtained only negative results 
 with this substance.* On the whole, however, it 
 seems that the extracts, especially of syphilitic 
 organs, give the most uniform results. 
 
 At the present time, therefore, Wassermann be- 
 lieves that the really active principle in the antigen 
 may be a combination of lipoids with certain protein- 
 like substances, and that the latter component, 
 
 * See especially Noguchi, The Relation of Protein, Lipoids and 
 Salts to the Wassermann Reaction, Journ Exp Medicine, vol. 
 xi, 1909. 
 
196 APPENDIX 
 
 when it is derived from syphilitic material, has 
 something of a specific character. In this connec- 
 tion Wassermann refers to the researches of 
 Noguchi, Landsteiner, and others which show that 
 minute quantities of proteid mixed with lipoids 
 may cause, extensive alterations in the physico- 
 chemical behavior of the latter. He thinks that 
 under certain circumstances this proteid component 
 may play an important role in determining the 
 reliability of the reaction, a view which is borne out 
 by the investigations of Neisser and Bruck. 
 
 While Forges and Meier were engaged in the 
 studies just mentioned, Fornet and also Michaelis 
 showed that when the serum of individuals infected 
 with syphilis was mixed with certain antigens a 
 zone of precipitation might at times be observed at 
 the point of contact of the two fluids. The antigen 
 employed by Fornet was serum from individuals in 
 the florid stage of syphilis ; Michaelis used extracts 
 of organs from a syphilitic foetus. This of course 
 agrees with what was already known from the work 
 of Bordet, Gengou, and Gay. In fact, according 
 to Gay, the deflection or absorption of complement, 
 on which the Bordet-Gengou test depends, may be 
 due to the precipitate formed in the combination. 
 
 Forges and Meier thereupon tested the alcoholic 
 extracts, and solutions of lecithin and of glycocho- 
 late of soda to see whether this zone of precipita- 
 tion was at all constant, and whether it might not 
 be possible to substitute such a simple precipitation 
 test for the complicated Wassermann reaction. 
 
APPENDIX 197 
 
 While it was found that the test was roughly spe- 
 cific, it was soon realized that a precipitate might 
 at times be produced with the serum of surely 
 non-syphilitic individuals, and similar unfavorable 
 results, have since been published by other authors. 
 At the present time, therefore, the only reliable 
 serum diagnosis of syphilis is that based on the 
 absorption of complement. 
 
 The results obtained with the Wassermann test are 
 well reflected in the findings of Fleischmann, as 
 follows : 
 
 The total number of persons tested was 230, of 
 which 38 were controls. None of the latter gave a 
 positive reaction. The other cases can be arranged 
 into four groups thus : 
 
 1 i ) Cases surely syphilitic, with clinically manifest 
 signs of syphilis at the time of the test. Of 89 such 
 cases tested, 83 gave a positive reaction (93%). 
 
 (2) Cases surely syphilitic but without clinical 
 symptoms at the time of the test. Of 64 such 
 cases tested, 33 gave a positive reaction (52%), and 
 31 gave a negative reaction (48%). 
 
 (3) Cases with symptoms suggestive of syphilis, 
 and with an indefinite history of infection. Of 32 
 such cases, 16 gave a positive reaction (50%), and 
 the rest a negative reaction. 
 
 (4) Surely syphilitic individuals showing cutaneous 
 lesions which the dermatologists diagnosed as very 
 probably not syphilitic. Of 7 such cases, i gave a 
 positive reaction and the rest a negative reaction. 
 
 Bruck and Stern tested 378 cases suspected to be 
 
198 APPENDIX 
 
 syphilitic, and obtained a positive reaction in 204. 
 They also tested 157 surely non-syphilitic individuals 
 as controls, and found all but two negative. These 
 two gave a doubtful reaction. 
 
 In a recent paper Wassermann has collected data 
 on about 3000 tests, as follows: There were 1010 
 tests on cases surely non-syphilitic (controls), and 
 not one of these gave a positive reaction. Of the 
 1982 surely syphilitic cases tested, those examined 
 at the time when they had manifest symptoms 
 reacted in about 90% of the cases. When the cases 
 tested were without manifest symptoms, so-called 
 "latent syphilitics," about 50% reacted. 
 
 As a matter of interest it may be mentioned that 
 Blumenthal and Wile tested the urine of syphilitic 
 individuals, and found that this too would give the 
 reaction. 
 
 Marie and Levaditi examined the cerebrospinal 
 fluid of 30 cases of general paresis. All but two of 
 the cases gave a positive reaction. When the serum 
 was tested in place of the cerebrospinal fluid, the 
 percentage of positive findings dropped to 59%. 
 
 Michaelis examined 20 cases of general paresis 
 and obtained a positive reaction in 1 8 of them. 
 
 Citron examined 43 tabetics and paretics, and ob- 
 tained a positive reaction in 34 cases (79%). He 
 also tested the serum of 108 persons surely infected 
 with syphilis, or suspected to be infected, and ob- 
 tained a positive reaction in 80 (74%). None of the 
 sera from 156 surely non-syphilitic individuals gave 
 a positive reaction. 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 199 
 
 Favorable reports have also been published con- 
 cerning the reliability of the test in ophthalmology, 
 dermatology, and other departments of medicine. 
 
 From the researches of Noguchi and others it 
 appears that with the progress of the cure of syphi- 
 litic infection not only do the symptoms of the 
 disease abate, but the blood reaction also grows 
 weaker and weaker, until ultimately, when cure 
 has been established, the reaction can no longer 
 be obtained. This is of clinical interest, for 
 it enables one, by means of the serum test, to 
 control the duration and efficacy of anti-syphilitic 
 treatment. At the same time it must be remem- 
 bered that the disappearance of the reaction need 
 not necessarily be permanent. Its reappearance, of 
 course, signifies that the virus is still present in the 
 body. 
 
APPENDIX B 
 
 NOGUCHI'S MODIFIED WASSERMANN REACTION.* 
 
 A MODIFICATION of the Wassermann test recently 
 devised by Noguchi has been found both simple 
 and reliable. In principle, the test is the same as 
 Wassermann's, the only difference being in the 
 hasmolytic system employed. By making use of an 
 antihuman amboceptor, Noguchi avoids having con- 
 stantly to obtain fresh sheep blood cells. In addi- 
 tion there is some gain in accuracy owing to the 
 fact that human blood serum, in the quantities 
 ordinarily employed in the Wassermann test, often 
 contains normal amboceptors for sheep blood which 
 interfere with the reaction. 
 
 The reagents employed by Noguchi are as follows : 
 
 1. Antihuman haemolytic amboceptor. This con- 
 sists of a serum obtained from rabbits immunized 
 with washed human erythrocytes. 
 
 2. Complement. This consists of fresh guinea- 
 pig serum. 
 
 3. " Antigen." Alcoholic extracts of organs, or 
 crude preparations of lecithin. The preparation of 
 the organ extracts has been described on page 152. 
 
 * Noguchi, A New and Simple Method for the Serum Diagonosis 
 of Syphilis, Journ. Exp. Medicine, Vol. XI, 1909. 
 
 200 
 
APPENDIX 201 
 
 In using lecithin, 0.3 gms. lecithin are dissolved in 
 50 cc. absolute alcohol, shaken with 50 cc. physio- 
 logical salt solution and filtered. The filtrate must 
 be clear. 
 
 4. Suspension of human blood corpuscles. One 
 drop of blood from a normal individual is mixed 
 with 4 cc. physiological salt solution. 
 
 5. Serum to be tested. About 10 or 15 drops of 
 blood are collected in a small tube and allowed to 
 clot. The clear serum is used for the tests. 
 
 Method. Take six clean test tubes, size 10 cm. 
 by i cm. Into the first two of these place one drop 
 from a capillary pipette of the patient's serum to be 
 tested. Into each of the second two tubes (which 
 serve as controls) put one drop of serum of a syphi- 
 litic case known to give a positive reaction. Into 
 each of the third pair of tubes put one drop of 
 serum of a normal person. Now to each of the six 
 tubes add i cc. of the suspension of human blood 
 corpuscles and 0.04 cc. fresh guinea-pig serum as 
 complement. Lastly, into one tube of each pair 
 put one drop of the " antigen " solution from a 
 capillary pipette. The second tube of each pair 
 receives no antigen. 
 
 After being well mixed by shaking, the six tubes 
 are incubated at 3 7 C. for one hour, after which each 
 tube receives two units * of antihuman amboceptor. 
 The tubes are returned to the incubator for two 
 
 * The term "amboceptor unit" is used to designate the amount of 
 ambcceptor which, on the addition of the optimum amount of comple- 
 ment, just suffices to produce complete haemolysis. 
 
202 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 hc'irs longer, and then kept at room temperature, 
 the reaction being read from time to time. The 
 interpretation of the result is identical with that of 
 the Wassermann reaction. 
 
 The following scheme accompanying Noguchi's 
 article will serve to elucidate the technique. 
 
 
 
 First Central Set. 
 
 Second Control Set. 
 
 
 Test for Diagnosis. 
 
 Test with a known 
 svphilitic -erum. 
 
 Test with a normal 
 serum. 
 
 
 
 (Positive reaction.) 
 
 (Negative reaction.) 
 
 
 a. Patient's 
 
 a 1 '. Posi- 
 
 a". Normal 
 
 
 serum 
 
 tive 
 
 serum 
 
 
 
 luetic 
 
 
 Control tube 
 
 
 serum 
 
 
 without 
 
 Q b. Human 
 
 Q b. Human 
 
 Q b. Human 
 
 "antigen" 
 
 blood 
 
 blood 
 
 blood 
 
 in each test 
 
 suspen- 
 
 suspen- 
 
 suspen- 
 
 
 sion 
 
 sion 
 
 sion 
 
 
 c. Comple- 
 
 c. Comple- 
 
 c. Comple- 
 
 
 ment 
 
 ment 
 
 ment 
 
 Determina- 
 
 a. 1 
 
 a'. I 
 
 a "'l 
 
 tive tube, 
 
 ^ &. [ Ditto 
 
 ^ b. \ Ditto 
 
 r ^ b. i Ditto 
 
 contains 
 
 U c. J 
 
 U c. J 
 
 U c. J 
 
 "antigen" 
 
 d. Antigen 
 
 d. Antigen 
 
 d. Antigen 
 
 
 Incubation at 37 C. for one hour. 
 
 
 Antihuman haemolytic amboceptor to all tubes. 
 
 
 Incubation at 37 C. for two hours longer, then at 
 
 
 room temp. 
 
 Noguchi has very cleverly adapted his method 
 for clinical purposes by drying the various reagents 
 on paper and standardizing them. He prepares 
 three kinds of slips, as follows: 
 
APPENDIX 203 
 
 Antihuman amboceptor slips, each containing two 
 amboceptor units. 
 
 Complement slips, each containing sufficient com- 
 plement for one tube. 
 
 Antigen slips, each containing sufficient for one 
 tube. 
 
 These papers can be kept indefinitely at room 
 temperature in a dry place. Prior to using the slips 
 for a blood test it is necessary to make preliminary 
 tests to prove their activity and strength. 
 
 In employing the filter paper slips they are 
 dropped by means of a forceps into the test tubes 
 containing the human blood suspension and patient's 
 serum in the order and at the intervals already 
 stated for the respective reagents. If an incubator 
 is not at hand, the tubes can be kept warm by 
 carrying them in the vest pocket. 
 
APPENDIX C 
 
 BLOOD EXAMINATION PREPARATORY TO TRANSFUSION 
 
 Reasons for Making the Examination. We have 
 already called attention to the occurrence of iso- 
 agglutinins, isohaemolysins, and isoprecipitins and 
 their bearing on homologous transfusion. The 
 mere occurrence of these substances in blood serum, 
 to be sure, does not at all prove that isoagglutina- 
 tion or isohaemolysis or isoprecipitation occur when 
 such transfusions are done. In fact we do not even 
 know whether these substances exist at all in the 
 blood plasma. Nevertheless, until we learn other- 
 wise, it will be well to bear in mind the possible 
 danger from this source, and to undertake no 
 transfusions in which examination shows the exist- 
 ence of homologous antibodies. 
 
 Technique of the Tests. It is evident that our 
 tests must be reciprocal, i.e., we must test the 
 serum of both donor and recipient against the 
 blood corpuscles of the other. To do this we col- 
 lect part of the blood from each individual, part 
 
 in citrated salt solution and part in a plain test- 
 
 204 
 
APPENDIX 205 
 
 tube. The latter is allowed to clot and furnishes 
 the serum; the former is prevented from clotting 
 by the sodium citrate and serves to supply the 
 blood corpuscles. Instead of using sodium citrate, 
 Crile, 1 defibrinates the blood by shaking it in a 
 test-tube with a glass bead, and suspending the 
 blood corpuscles in physiological salt solution. 
 Either method may be used, though with the 
 sodium citrate it is necessary to centrifuge, wash 
 the blood corpuscles, and then resuspend them in 
 salt solution. The suspensions are usually 5% 
 strength. 
 
 In carrying out the test equal parts of serum and 
 blood suspension are mixed in a small test-tube, or, 
 as Epstein 2 has suggested, in small pipettes such 
 as Wright uses for his opsonic tests. After mixing, 
 the tubes are placed in the thermostat for two hours. 
 At the end of this time most of the cells have 
 usually settled to the bottom and pronounced 
 haemolysis can be seen. For finer grades of haemo- 
 lysis it is usually necessary to allow the tubes to 
 stand over night in the refrigerator. 
 
 Agglutination, when it occurs, is rather prompt, 
 and can be readily observed in the gross by the 
 clumping and sedimentation of the blood corpuscles. 
 
 1 Crile, Hemorrhage and Transfusion, 1909, Appleton and 
 Co., New York. 
 
 2 Epstein and Ottenburg, Archives of Internal Medecine, 
 Vol. iii, page 286, 1909. 
 
206 APPENDIX 
 
 It is important in the haemolytic tests that all 
 the glassware be absolutely clean and dry, though 
 it need not be sterile. 
 
 In testing for the presence of isoprecipitins, equal 
 parts of the two sera are mixed in a small test-tube, 
 the mixtures kept in the incubator for two hours 
 and then examined. 
 
APPENDIX D 
 
 OTHER REACTIONS 
 
 The Conglutination Reaction 
 
 IN 1906 Bordet and Gay described the presence 
 in bovine serum of a substance having the property 
 of producing a characteristic clumping of red blood- 
 cells and of accelerating their lysis provided the 
 cells had first been treated with both sensitizer 
 (amboceptor) and alexin (complement) ; its action 
 was possible under no other circumstances. Subse- 
 quently it was shown that the same phenomenon 
 could be produced with bacteria treated with a 
 specific sensitizer and alexin. This substance is 
 spoken of as "conglutinin." From the work of 
 Bordet, Streng, Gay, and others it would appear 
 that the conglutination reaction can be employed 
 to discover the presence of specific sensitizers 
 (amboceptors) , and thus be applied to the diagnosis 
 of bacterial infections. The experimental work 
 thus far done on the subject is still too meagre to 
 warrant any definite statements as to the diag- 
 nostic value of the reaction. In some infections 
 studied by Gay the conglutination reaction appeared 
 
 earlier than the agglutination reaction. 
 
 207 
 
20$ APPENDIX 
 
 The Meiostagmin Reaction 
 
 Weichardt called attention to the fact that the 
 union of antigen with its antibody in certain dilu- 
 tions caused an increase in the rate of diffusion, 
 i.e., gave rise to changes in the osmotic pressure 
 and of the surface tension. Ascoli showed that the 
 decrease in the surface tension arising when bac- 
 terial substances combined with their specific antigen 
 could be measured by counting the number of drops 
 per given time interval delivered from a Traube 
 stalagmometer. Thus where a mixture of normal 
 serum with extract of typhoid bacilli showed 56 
 drops, a similar mixture of serum from a typhoid 
 fever patient with the extract showed 58 drops. 
 Attempts have been made to utilize the meiostag- 
 min reaction in the diagnosis of various infectious 
 diseases, and while the results on the whole have 
 shown the correctness of the underlying principles, 
 they have also demonstrated that other reactions 
 are far more convenient and decisive. 
 
 The Much-Holzmann Cobra Venom Reaction 
 
 It has long been known that cobra venom haemo- 
 lyzes red blood corpuscles, and that certain cor- 
 puscles, such as those of man, dog, pig, horse, 
 rabbit, and guinea-pig haemolyze directly on mixing 
 them with cobra v-enom, while others require the 
 
APPENDIX 209 
 
 intervention of an activating substance. To the 
 latter class belong the blood corpuscles of ox, 
 sheep, and goat. As already pointed out in dis- 
 cussing snake venoms, the activating substance is 
 present in blood serum; it is also present in com- 
 mercial lecithin. Haemolysis of either group of 
 blood corpuscles can be inhibited by means of 
 cholesterin, though just how this substance acts is 
 not clear. Much and Holzmann showed that the 
 blood serum of patients suffering from various 
 mental disorders, especially dementia praecox, and 
 manic-depressive insanity frequently inhibits hae- 
 molysis of human red blood corpuscles, and they 
 suggested that the reaction could be used for 
 diagnostic purposes. While it appears to be true 
 that the psychoses yield the largest proportion of 
 positive reactions, the value of the reaction for 
 diagnostic purposes is practically nil. At the same 
 time it is interesting to note that diseases of the 
 nervous system accompanied by demonstrable 
 lesions of the nerve tissue give the same reaction as 
 psychoses in which such lesions have not yet been 
 demonstrated. Much 1 therefore concludes that in 
 both cases the same substance circulates in the 
 blood, and that, moreover, in both this substance 
 is derived from a degeneration of the nerve tissue. 
 
 1 Much, Die Immunitatswissenschaft. C. Kabitzsch, Wiirz- 
 burg, 1911. i 
 
210 APPENDIX 
 
 Weil's Cobra Venom Test in Syphilis 
 
 In studying the varying resistance of red blood 
 corpuscles to haemolytic agents, Weil 1 noted that 
 the corpuscles of syphilitics were regularly more 
 resistant to the action of cobra venom than those 
 of normal individuals. Just what is the cause of 
 this increased resistance is not entirely clear. It 
 is known that syphilis attacks the lipoids of the 
 body, and that the amount of lecithin which can 
 be extracted from the tissues is less in syphilitic 
 conditions than in normal individuals. The in- 
 creased resistance has therefore been thought to 
 be due to a decrease in the lecithin content of the 
 red blood corpuscles. 
 
 In testing the corpuscles the blood is collected 
 in citrated salt solution, and then washed by 
 repeated centrifugalization in order to thoroughly 
 remove the serum. Even slight traces of 
 serum interfere decidedly with the reaction. The 
 washed cells are made up into a four per cent 
 suspension in 0.9 per cent common salt solution. 
 Centrifugalization is done in very accurately grad- 
 uated centrifuge tubes, as the accurate dilution of 
 the cells is a matter of very great importance. 
 The cobra venom, which is kept in the dried con- 
 
 1 Weil, Richard, Journal of Infectious Diseases, Vol. vi, Nov., 
 1909. Proceedings Society Exp. Biology and Medicine, Vol. vi 
 and Vol. vii. 
 
APPENDIX 211 
 
 dition, is made up very accurately in small quan- 
 tities into a 0.05 per cent solution in 0.9 per cent 
 solution of common salt. From this stock solution, 
 higher dilutions are prepared as required, and are 
 kept at a constant low temperature. In carrying 
 out the test four solutions are prepared, namely, 
 i in 10,000, 20,000, 30,000, and 40,000. One cc. 
 of the corpuscle suspension is added to one cc. of 
 the venom solution. The mixtures are incubated 
 for one hour at 40 C., after which a preliminary 
 inspection will almost invariably reveal the final 
 results of the tests. At this stage, cells showing 
 no haemolysis with i to 10,000 venom are strongly 
 positive, cells showing no haemolysis with i to 
 20,000 are positive, cells showing very slight hsemol- 
 ysis at i to 30,000 are weakly positive; cells show- 
 ing moderate destruction at i to 30,000 are negative, 
 and cells showing the least appreciable trace of 
 haemolysis at i to 40,000 are strongly negative. 
 After the preliminary reading the mixtures are 
 again shaken and then kept in the ice-box over 
 night, the final readings being made on the follow- 
 ing morning. The figures here given are merely 
 those of a particular specimen of cobra venom; 
 it is possible that other samples might differ in 
 strength. At all events a preliminary titration 
 against corpuscles derived from cases of known 
 syphilis and controls suffices to determine the 
 values for any given sample. Inasmuch as the 
 
212 APPENDIX 
 
 strength of the dried venom does not vary, this 
 preliminary titration gives a constant standard, 
 which is practically permanent, since one gram of 
 venom suffices for about 5000 complete tests. The 
 standardization is different for infants as compared 
 with adults, for the red corpuscles of infants and 
 young children haemolyze much more readily than 
 those of adults. The cells, however, acquire the 
 same degree of resistance as do those of adults in 
 disease. 
 
 Weil states that the cobra venom reaction appears 
 to have certain advantages over the Wassermann 
 reaction. It is much simpler and the labor much 
 less. Less blood is required, so that a few drops 
 from the lobe of the ear suffice for a reaction; this 
 is of some importance in infants. Cases of scarlet 
 fever and of leprosy do not offer a source of con- 
 fusion. The reaction is more marked in old, 
 apparently dormant cases. The reaction persists 
 much longer after mercurialization, thus offering a 
 further diagnostic and therapeutic test. The reac- 
 tion is possible in cases of jaundice, whereas the 
 Wassermann is not. 
 
 Antitrypsin Determinations. 
 
 We have already pointed out that the animal 
 body responds to the injection of ferments by 
 the production of antiferments. Considerable in- 
 
APPENDIX 21- 
 
 vy 
 
 terest has been aroused by the discovery that in 
 certain diseases, especially cancer, the antitrypsin 
 content of the patient's serum is markedly in- 
 creased. In cancer this increase is noted in about 
 90 per cent of the cases. The antiferment action 
 is not entirely specific, but extends to other pro- 
 teolytic ferments, and particularly to the ferment 
 of leucocytes. At the present time, therefore, a 
 marked increase in the antitryptic power of a 
 patient's serum is taken to indicate an increased 
 parenteral * destruction of proteid in the body. 2 
 The original method of demonstrating the presence 
 of this antitrypsin was by placing drops of pro- 
 teolytic ferment (trypsin) on the surface of a plate 
 of Loeffler's serum, and causing the development of 
 small concavities owing to the digestion of the 
 medium. The addition of inhibiting serum to the 
 drops was able to prevent the formation of - the 
 concavities. A more convenient and accurate 
 method is the one developed by v. Bergmann and 
 Meyer. This depends on the digestion of a per- 
 fectly clear solution of casein. If all the casein has 
 been digested, the addition of acid is obviously 
 unable to precipitate any casein from solution. 
 On the other hand, if the acid causes clouding or 
 precipitation, it follows that all the casein was not 
 
 1 Other than intestinal. 
 
 2 See the excellent digest of the work on this subject in Jahres- 
 bericht der Immunitatsforschung, Bd. V, 1909, Abteilung I, page 
 58. 
 
APPENDIX 
 
 digested. It is evident that the quantity of trypsin 
 required to digest a given amount of casein can be 
 exactly determined, and that by employing grad- 
 uated amounts of the inhibiting serum accurate 
 determinations of the antitryptic content can be 
 made. 
 
INDEX OF AUTHORS 
 
 Abel, 17, 100 
 Anderson, 142, 160 
 Altmann, 195 
 Aronson, 5 
 Arrhenius, 28 
 Arthus, 141 
 Ascoli, 208 
 Atkinson, 18 
 Auer, 150 
 
 Bail, 93, 158 
 
 Banzhaf, 19, 151, 153 
 
 Beebe, 125 
 
 von Behring, i, 5, 170 
 
 Belfanti, 18 
 
 von Bergmann, 013 
 
 Besredka, 82, 84 
 
 Blumenthal, 198 
 
 von Bokay, 144 
 
 Bolduan, 135 
 
 Bordet, 28, 40, 52, 56, 67, 87 
 
 96, 108, 185, 207 
 Braun, 194 
 Bruck, 72, 196 
 Buchner, i, 6, 50, 75, 78, 93 
 Buxton, 104 
 
 Calmette, 18, 137 
 Carbone, 18 
 Castellani, 46 
 
 Citron, 158, 198 
 Crile, 205 
 
 Dallera, 143 
 
 Delezenne, 121 
 
 Deutsch, 1 66 
 
 Dieudonne, 18, 113 
 
 Doerr, 149, 158 
 
 Donath, 94 
 
 Douglas, 128 
 
 von Dungern, 16, 54, 79, 85, 
 
 Qi, I2 5 
 Durham, 37 
 
 Ehrlich, 6, u, 13, 16, 23, 39, 
 47, 58, 67, 84, 87, 92, 97, 
 112, 159, 166, 179 
 
 Eisenberg, 39, in 
 
 Epstein, 205 
 
 Famulener, 153 
 Field, 43 
 Fischer, 9 
 
 Fleischmann, 195, 197 
 Flexner, 137 
 Floyd, 178 
 Fodor, 50 
 Ford, 17 
 Fornet, 196 
 Friedberger, 42, 156 
 
216 
 
 INDEX OF A UTHORS 
 
 Gay, 73, 88, 96, 104, 146, 196, 
 
 207 
 Gengon, 40, 71, 99, 163, 185, 
 
 196 
 
 Gibson, 18 
 Grassberger, 29 
 Gruber, 36, 93 
 Griinbaum, 37 
 Gscheidlen, 50 
 
 Haeckel, 127 
 Hahn, 93 
 Hamburger, 148 
 Hektoen, 130 
 Hericourt, 141 
 Heubner, 144 
 Hiss, 177 
 Holzmann, 208 
 
 Jackson, 126 
 Jansky, 35 
 Jenner, 169 
 Jordan, 150 
 
 Kitasato, i 
 Kleine, 166 
 Knorr, 2, 5 
 Kraus, 108 
 Kyes, 137 
 
 Landois, 74, 143 
 Landsteiner, 35, 54, 94, 123, 
 
 194, 196 
 Leblanc, in 
 Leclainche, 109 
 Ledingham, 20 
 Leishman, 131 
 Levaditi, 194, 198 
 Lewis, 150 
 Loffler, 100 
 Lucas, 178 
 
 Manwaring, 139 
 
 Marie, 194, 198 
 
 Marrassini, 125 
 
 Martin, 5 
 
 Marx, 86 
 
 Meier, 194 
 
 Mertens, 109 
 
 Mesnil, 166 
 
 Metchnikoff, 38, 52, 58, 63, 
 
 82, 84, 91, 93, 99, 121, i27 ; 
 
 1 60 
 
 Meyer, 213 
 Michaelis, 196 
 Moreschi, 97 
 
 Morgenroth, 18, 29, 71, 109 
 Moro, 148 
 Moss, 35, 98 
 Moxter, 86, 93, 123 
 Much, 208 
 Muir, 67 
 
 Muller, 63, 91, 194 
 Myers, 109 
 
 Neisser, 72, 100, 196 
 
 Neudorfer, 143 
 
 Neufeld, 129 
 
 Nissen, 74 
 
 Noguchi, 137, 195, 199, 200 
 
 Nolf, 91 
 
 Nuttall, 50, 74, no, 115 
 
 Obermayer, in 
 Ottenburg, 205 
 Otto, 141 
 Opie, 162 
 
 Park, 2, 74 
 Pasteur, 169, 171 
 Pearce, 126 
 Pfaundler, 38 
 
INDEX OF A UTHORS 
 
 217 
 
 Pfeiffer, 37, 51, 86, 93 
 
 Pick, 19, 109, in 
 
 von Pirquet, 142, 147, 164 
 
 Plant, 192 
 
 Porges, 194 
 
 Potzl, 194 
 
 Richet, 141 
 Rimpau, 129 
 Rosenau, 142 
 Roux, 5 
 Russ, 149 
 
 Sachs, 73, 137, 195 
 Salge, 161 
 Salmon, 171 
 Schattenfroh, 29, 93 
 Schick, 142 
 Schultz, 150 
 Schiitze, 109, 113, 120 
 Smith, 141, 161, 171 
 Southard, 146 
 Spiro, 109 
 Steinhardt, 151 
 Stern, 109, 113, 197 
 Streng, 207 
 
 Tchistowitch, 107 
 Touissant, 171 
 Traube, 50 
 
 Uhlenhuth, 109, 113 
 
 Vallee, 109 
 Volk. 39 
 
 von Wassermann, 13, 1 8, 72, 7- 
 86, 92, 93, 99, 109, 113, 15; 
 185, 192 
 
 Wechsberg, 100 
 
 Wechselmann, 183 
 
 Weichardt, 208 
 
 Weigert, 10 
 
 Weil, 194 
 
 Weil, R., 210 
 
 Welch, 165 
 
 Wernicke, 5 
 
 Widal, 37 
 
 Wile, 198 
 
 Wright, 128, 131, 173 
 
 Zinsser, 178 
 Ziilzer, 109 
 
SUBJECT INDEX 
 
 PA.GE 
 
 Abrin 21 
 
 Absorption, in study of agglutinins 46 
 
 of complement, see Bordet-Gengou 71 
 
 and Neisser-Wechsberg 100 
 
 Active immunization, methods 171 
 
 Adsorption, as applied to toxin-antitoxin 30 
 
 elective character 31 
 
 Agglutination, in typhoid fever 37 
 
 influence of dilution on 34 
 
 phenomenon of 32 
 
 purpose of 36 
 
 specificity of 44 
 
 Agglutinin 32 
 
 against trypanosomes 34 
 
 effect of heat on 39 
 
 nature of 39 
 
 Agglutinoid 39 
 
 Aleuronat, in production of Icucocytic exudates 177 
 
 Alexin, see also complement 56 
 
 Allergy 147 
 
 Amboceptor, definition 63 
 
 unit 20 1 
 
 Antibacterial sera, practical value of 104 
 
 Antibodies, cells concerned in production cf n 
 
 Anticomplement 86, 88 
 
 views concerning '. . . . 96 
 
 Anticomplementary serum, specificity of 90 
 
 Anticy totoxin 122 
 
 Antigen, definition of 16 
 
 for syphilis test 190 
 
 Antihaemolysins, their nature 86 
 
 219 
 
220 SUBJECT INDEX 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Antiprecipitin 119 
 
 Antiserum, for snake venoms 137 
 
 Antitoxic globulins 1 8 
 
 Antitoxin, action on toxins 18 
 
 diphtheria, production of 2 
 
 diphtheria, testing of 5 
 
 historical i 
 
 nature of r. 17 
 
 quantitative relation to toxin 31 
 
 relation to toxin 22 
 
 unit 22 
 
 Antitrypsin, determination of 212 
 
 Antivenins 139 
 
 Anaphylactic shock 142 
 
 pathology of 150 
 
 prevention by chloral hydrate 153 
 
 Anaphylatoxin 157 
 
 Aggressins 158 
 
 Anaphylaxis, historical 141 
 
 relation to precipitins 148 
 
 relation to serum therapy , 151 
 
 theories of 144 
 
 Anthrax, symptomatic, toxin of 29 
 
 Antianaphylaxis 1.^3 
 
 Asthma, relation to anaphylaxis 151 
 
 Atrepsy 166 
 
 Autolysins 97 
 
 Bacterial precipitins 108 
 
 Bactericidal serum, clinically 105 
 
 Bacteriolysins, historical 50 
 
 Bacteriolysis, of cholera spirilla 51 
 
 Bacteriotropic substances 127 
 
 Blood, biological reaction for 73, 1 13 
 
 examination for transfusion 204 
 
 its germicidal power 50, 74 
 
 cells, agglutination of 34 
 
 relationship, by means of precipitin test no 
 
 test, Neisser-Sachs 73 
 
SUBJECT INDEX 2 2i 
 
 Bordet-Gengou phenomenon 71 
 
 Brain tissue, effect on tetanus toxin 13 
 
 Cancer, immunization against 125 
 
 Casein, precipitin against 108 
 
 Chemoreceptors 181 
 
 Chloral hydrate, to prevent anaphylactic shock 153 
 
 Cholera spirilla, Pfeiffer's test 51 
 
 Clumping, see Agglutination . 32 
 
 Cobra-lecithid 139 
 
 Cobra venom 137 
 
 as test in syphilis 210 
 
 in haemolysis 208 
 
 Colloids, coagulability of 42 
 
 in the study of agglutination 42 
 
 Common receptors 83 
 
 Complement 64 
 
 absorption by precipitates 96 
 
 absorption of, see Bordet-Gengou 71 
 
 artificial increase 92 
 
 definition of . 63 
 
 deflection of i oo 
 
 effect of heat on 94 
 
 effect of phosphorus poisoning on 91 
 
 multiplicity of 70 
 
 source of 93 
 
 structure of 94 
 
 Complementoid 94 
 
 Complementophile group, Bordet's views concerning 67 
 
 Conglutination 207 
 
 Copula, definition of 63 
 
 Crotin 21 
 
 Cytotoxins, definition 121 
 
 produced by nucleo-proteid injections 125 
 
 specificity of 124 
 
 Desmon, definition of 63 
 
 Deviation of complement 100 
 
 Dissociation, in toxin-antitoxin action 29 
 
222 SUBJECT INDEX 
 
 Dosage, of lytic sera ..." 100 
 
 Dyeing, analogous to antitoxin reaction. 30 
 
 Electric charge, of agglutinins 43 
 
 Electrolytes, in relation to agglutination 41 
 
 Endotoxins, relation to infection 158 
 
 Endotoxin theory, applied to anaphylaxis 145 
 
 Epithelium, cytotoxin for 124 
 
 serum against 85 
 
 Fractional neutralization, in study of antitoxins 30 
 
 Ferments, in leucocytes 162 
 
 Globulin, antitoxic 18 
 
 Group agglutination 44 
 
 Gruber- Widal reaction 37 
 
 Haemagglutinins 34 
 
 Haemolysin, discovery of . . 52 
 
 Haemorrhagin, of snake venom 138 
 
 Haptins, definition of 16 
 
 Haptophore group, nature of 7 
 
 Heat, effect on serum 40, 96 
 
 Hypersensitization, to serum 142 
 
 Immediate reaction 145 
 
 Immune bodies, site of production 86 
 
 Immune body , . . . 64 
 
 nature of 82 
 
 Immunity, acquired 160 
 
 hereditary transmission 160 
 
 mechanism of 162 
 
 natural, variations in 159 
 
 relation of anaphylaxis to 163 
 
 varieties of 158 
 
 Immunization, active contrasted with passive 161 
 
 active, methods of 171 
 
 against diphtheria toxin. . .- 3 
 
 with partially neutralized toxins 12 
 
SUBJECT INDEX 223 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Inactivated serum . . . . : 54 
 
 Index, opsonic 132 
 
 Infection, nature of 154 
 
 relation of anaphylaxis to 156 
 
 relation of virus to 154 
 
 Inflammation, Opie's researches on 162 
 
 Interbody of normal serum 77 
 
 Isoagglutinin, occurrence of in normal human sera 35 
 
 relation to homologous transfusion 36 
 
 Isolysins, occurrence of in man 98 
 
 nature of 97 
 
 Isoprecipitin 120 
 
 Lactoserum. . . i 108 
 
 Lecithid, of cobra venom 139 
 
 Leucocytes, as source of complement 93 
 
 ferments in 162 
 
 phagocytic action of 127 
 
 Leucocyte extract, in treatment of infections 177 
 
 Leucotoxin 121 
 
 Liver, role in production of complement 91 
 
 L and L| 23 
 
 Lysins, relation to agglutinins 36 
 
 Mastic, agglutination of 41 
 
 Meiostagmin reaction 208 
 
 Milk, human and bovine tested biologically 112 
 
 Much-Holzmann reaction 208 
 
 Mussels, toxin of 141 
 
 Negative phase 133 
 
 Neisser-Sachs blood test 73 
 
 Neisser-Wechsberg phenomenon 100 
 
 Nephrotoxin 126 
 
 Neurotoxin 122 
 
 of snake venom 138 
 
 Noguchi's test for syphilis 200 
 
 Normal serum, agglutinating poweY of 34 
 
 contrasted with specific immune serum. 79 
 
224 SUBJECT INDEX 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Normal serum, its haemolytic and bacteriolytic action. . ; 73 
 
 Nucleo-proteid, for immunization 125 
 
 Opsonic index, clinical value cf 135 
 
 nature of 131 
 
 Opsonin, affinity of, for bacteria 129 
 
 histoi ical 127 
 
 structure of 130 
 
 Organotropism 179 
 
 Osmotic pressure, of serum, in infections 208 
 
 Parasitotropism 179 
 
 Parenteral digestion, of proteid 164 
 
 Partial immune bodies 82 
 
 Partial saturation method 24 
 
 Pfaundler's thread reaction 38 
 
 Pfeiffer's phenomenon 51 
 
 Phagocytosis 127 
 
 Phosphorus poisoning, effect on complement production. . . 91 
 
 Physical chemistry, applied to toxin-antitoxin reaction. ... 28 
 
 Precipitates, relation to anti-complement action 96 
 
 Precipitins, definition of , 107 
 
 in relation to animal species no 
 
 method of immunization 114 
 
 nature of in 
 
 specificity of 109 
 
 Precipitin test, for blood 116 
 
 various applications of 1 18 
 
 Preparator, definition of 63 
 
 Pro zone, in agglutination 39 
 
 relation of colloids to , 43 
 
 Proteid, cleavage of 157 
 
 parenteral digestion of 164 
 
 Protoxoid 26 
 
 Psychoses, serum diagnosis in 209 
 
 Ptomaines 20 
 
 Rash, from serum injections 143 
 
 Receptors, common 83 
 
SUBJECT INDEX 22 ' 5 
 
 Receptors, nature of g 
 
 various orders of 47 
 
 Reversible reactions in toxin-antitoxin combination 29 
 
 Ricin 21 
 
 Calts, their relation to agglutination 41 
 
 Salvarsan, chemistry of 182 
 
 principles governing treatment by 1 79 
 
 Serum, active and inactive 54 
 
 against epithelium 125 
 
 antibody content of compared to plasma 163 
 
 effect of heat on 40 
 
 mode of collection 4, 115 
 
 Serum diagnosis, in typhoid fever 37 
 
 Serum-fast trypanosomes 166 
 
 Serum rashes 143 
 
 Sessile receptors 14 
 
 Side-chain theory, applied to antitoxins. . . ; . 6 
 
 applied to bacteriolysins and haemolysins 68 
 
 Snake venom 137 
 
 Specific therapy, principles of 179 
 
 Specificity, cause of 65 
 
 nature of 65, 124 
 
 of agglutination 45 
 
 Spectrum, Ehrlich's so-called. 25 
 
 Spermatoxin 123 
 
 Split products, in anaphylaxis 146 
 
 Stimulins 128 
 
 Substance fixatrice 63 
 
 sensibilatrice 55 
 
 Syntoxoid 27 
 
 Syphilis, cobra venom test in 210 
 
 serum diagonsis of 185 
 
 specific treatment of .* 179 
 
 tests for 196 
 
 Tetanus toxin, affinity for brain tissue 13 
 
 Thread reaction 38 
 
 Toxin -antitoxin reaction 22-31 
 
226 SUBJECT INDEX 
 
 PAGE 
 
 Toxin, absorption of antitoxin by 31 
 
 diphtheria, preparation of 2 
 
 relation to antitoxin 22 
 
 Toxins, characteristics of 20 
 
 Toxoids, nature of 6 
 
 various kinds of 24 
 
 Toxons 24 
 
 Toxophore group, its influence in immunization 1 6 
 
 nature of 7 
 
 Transfusion, blood tests in 204 
 
 relation of isoagglutinins to 36 
 
 Trypanosomes, agglutinins against 34 
 
 serum-fast 1 66 
 
 Typhoid fever, Gruber-Widal reaction in 37 
 
 Uhlenhuth blood test 1 16 
 
 Vaccines, bacterial 169 
 
 bacterial, doses 175 
 
 Vaccine therapy 173 
 
 Venoms, of snakes 137 
 
 Viscosity of blood, relation to serum reactions 40 
 
 Wassermann test, for syphilis 185 
 
 Weigert's overproduction theory 9 
 
 Welch's hypothesis 165 
 
 Widal reaction 37 
 
 Zootoxins 21 
 
 Zymotoxic group 94 
 
THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE 
 STAMPED BELOW 
 
 AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS 
 
 WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN 
 THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY 
 WILL INCREASE TO SO CENTS ON THE FOURTH 
 DAY AND TO $I.OO ON THE SEVENTH DAY 
 OVERDUE. 
 
 
 29 1933 
 
 1K r 
 
 6 1941 
 
 * 
 
 RETURNED TO 
 
 Fffi isW 
 
 P1OLOGY LIBRARY 
 
 LD 21-50m-l,'3 
 
GfR 
 
 " 
 
 BIOLOGY 
 UBRARY 
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY